ADR10000_I&M MANUAL_8.2.4_253456107_Ed01

ADD-DROP MULTIPLEXER STM-64

ADR10000

Installation and Maintenance Manual

Version 8.2.4

253 456 107-A

3 000 377 028 R11 000 01

December 2011 Issue

LIST OF CHANGES

(A new edition replaces any previous versions)

No Date Change description

Page

253 456 107

3 000 377 028 R11 000 01

December 2011 Creation of original user guide All pages

WARNING SAGEMCOM carefully monitors all technical changes and strives continuously to improve its products for the benefit of its customers. It therefore reserves the right to change its documentation without prior notice.

ENVIRONMENT Preservation of the environment as part of a sustainable development logic is an essential concern of SAGEMCOM. The desire of SAGEMCOM is to operate systems observing the environment and consequently it has decided to integrate environmental performances in the life cycle of its products, from manufacturing to commissioning, use and elimination. PACKAGING:

The presence of the logo (green dot) means that a contribution is paid to an approved national organisation to improve packaging recovery and recycling infrastructures. To facilitate recycling, please respect the sorting rules set up locally for this kind of waste.

THE PRODUCT:

The crossed-out waste bin stuck on the product (or on its accessories) means that the product belongs to the family of electrical and electronic equipment.

In this respect, the European regulations ask you to dispose of it selectively:

• At sales points in the event of the purchase of similar equipment. • At the collection points made available to you locally (drop-off

centre, selective collection, etc.).

In this way you can participate in the re-use and upgrading of WEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment), which can have an effect on the environment and human health. CE MARKING :

The CE marking certifies that the product complies with the essential requirements of the Directive 1999/5/EC concerning telecommunication equipment, and of Directives 2006/95/EC concerning safety, 2004/108/EC concerning electromagnetic compatibility, defined by the European Parliament and Council to minimize electromagnetic interferences, ensure the safety of users and their equipment and protect health.

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page i

Contents About This Manual .................................................................. xiii

Overview ........................................................................................................... xiii Intended Audience ............................................................................................ xiii Document Organization..................................................................................... xiv Document Conventions ..................................................................................... xiv Related Documentation...................................................................................... xv Obtaining Technical Documentation .................................................................. xv Technical Assistance......................................................................................... xvi

Installing ADR10000: Before You Start Safety Guidelines ..1-1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-1 Warning Definition ............................................................................................ 1-2 Qualified Personnel Warning............................................................................ 1-3 Installation Warning.......................................................................................... 1-4 General Safety Requirements .......................................................................... 1-5 Jewelry Removal Warning................................................................................ 1-6 Grounding Requirements ................................................................................. 1-7 Power Supply Requirements.......................................................................... 1-10 UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements............................................. 1-15 ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements ................................ 1-17 Laser Safety Requirements............................................................................ 1-19 Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge .................................................... 1-22 Environmental and Health Concerns.............................................................. 1-27

Introduction.............................................................................. 2-1 ADR10000 Platform Overview ......................................................................... 2-1 ADR10000 I/O Protection Options ................................................................... 2-2

Site Preparation and Rack Installation .................................. 3-1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1 Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 3-5 Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection................................................... 3-6 ADR Rack Installation Options ......................................................................... 3-7 Preparing Cables and Fibers............................................................................ 3-8 ADR10000 Accessories ................................................................................. 3-19 Equipment Installation .................................................................................... 3-34 Rack Installation ............................................................................................. 3-43 Installing Ancillary Units in Racks................................................................... 3-49

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page ii

Platform Installation ................................................................ 4-1 Installation Options........................................................................................... 4-1 Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in Racks........................................................... 4-7 Grounding the ADR10000 Shelf..................................................................... 4-27

Card and Module Installation ................................................. 5-1 Installing ADR10000 Cards .............................................................................. 5-1 Installing ADR10000 Modules ........................................................................ 5-12 Installing TPU Modules .................................................................................. 5-21 Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR10000 Shelf................................................ 5-28

Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing................. 6-1 Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks.............................................. 6-1

Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 7-1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 7-1 Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 7-2 Site Commissioning Tests................................................................................ 7-3 Network Commissioning Tests......................................................................... 7-6

Maintenance............................................................................. 8-1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1 Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................. 8-1 Preventive Maintenance................................................................................... 8-2 Traffic Monitoring System................................................................................. 8-7 Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 8-12 Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 8-21 Replacing RAP Components.......................................................................... 8-28

Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. A-1 Overview ..........................................................................................................A-1 ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors..............................................................A-2 MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors..............................................................A-9 PIM2_21 Connection Data .............................................................................A-10 PIM2_42 Connection Data .............................................................................A-13 PIM2_63/B Connection Data..........................................................................A-19 PIM2_63S Connection Data...........................................................................A-23 EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors ..................................................................A-31 xRAP-100 Connectors....................................................................................A-32 RAP-4B Connectors .......................................................................................A-37 xRAP-D Connectors .......................................................................................A-42

Standards and References .................................................... B-1 Overview ..........................................................................................................B-1 Broadband Forum ............................................................................................B-1

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page iii

Environmental Standards .................................................................................B-2 ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute...............................B-2 IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission ..............................................B-3 IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ......................................B-4 IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force ............................................................B-5 ISO: International Organization for Standardization.........................................B-7 ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union................................................B-8 MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum...........................................................................B-12 NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology ..................................B-13 North American Standards .............................................................................B-13 OMG: Object Management Group .................................................................B-14 TMF: TeleManagement Forum.......................................................................B-14 Web Protocol Standards ................................................................................B-14

Index .......................................................................................... I-1

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page v

List of Figures Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post ........................ 1-8 Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar................................... 1-9 Figure 1-3: ADR10000 TUV CE label .......................................................................... 1-16 Figure 1-4: Power input warning label ......................................................................... 1-16 Figure 1-5: Basic ESD warning symbol ....................................................................... 1-22 Figure 1-6: ADR10000 typical temporary EPA arrangement....................................... 1-25 Figure 1-7: Pollution control logos ............................................................................... 1-28 Figure 1-8: WEEE recycling symbol ............................................................................ 1-29 Figure 2-1: ADR10000 shelf........................................................................................... 2-2 Figure 2-2: Basic ADR10000 shelf, horizontal installation............................................. 2-3 Figure 2-3: Basic ADR10000 shelf, vertical Installation................................................. 2-4 Figure 2-4: ADR10000 with one TPU on top of the shelf............................................... 2-5 Figure 2-5: ADR10000 with two TPUs ........................................................................... 2-5 Figure 2-6: ADR10000 with an OCU and two TPUs...................................................... 2-6 Figure 3-1: ADR10000 horizontal installation space dimension .................................... 3-3 Figure 3-2: xRAP-D power supply flow ........................................................................ 3-20 Figure 3-3: xRAP-D front panel.................................................................................... 3-22 Figure 3-4: xRAP-D connectors ................................................................................... 3-24 Figure 3-5: xRAP-100 front panel ................................................................................ 3-26 Figure 3-6: xRAP-100 connectors................................................................................ 3-27 Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front panel................................................................................... 3-28 Figure 3-8: RAP-4B front panel.................................................................................... 3-30 Figure 3-9: RAP-4B alarm connectors ......................................................................... 3-31 Figure 3-10: Components of ADR10000 horizontal installation................................... 3-36 Figure 3-11: Components of ADR10000 vertical installation ....................................... 3-39 Figure 3-12: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks .......................................................... 3-46 Figure 3-13: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks................................................ 3-47 Figure 3-14: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead tray (2200 mm rack) ..................................................................................................... 3-48 Figure 3-15: Example of an approved European 19" rack........................................... 3-49 Figure 3-16: xRAP-D power supply flow ...................................................................... 3-52 Figure 3-17: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations................................... 3-53 Figure 3-18: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud ........................................................ 3-55 Figure 3-19: xRAP-D power supply flow ...................................................................... 3-55 Figure 3-20: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes...................................................... 3-56 Figure 3-21: Connecting DC power cables .................................................................. 3-57 Figure 3-22: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit ............................... 3-59 Figure 3-23: Replacement spacer screw ..................................................................... 3-59

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page vi

Figure 3-24: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit ............................. 3-60 Figure 3-25: Protection cover for xRAP-D ................................................................... 3-60 Figure 3-26: xRAP-D protective covers in place.......................................................... 3-61 Figure 3-27: Bottom panel for xRAP-D ........................................................................ 3-61 Figure 3-28: xRAP-D connectors ................................................................................. 3-62 Figure 3-29: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers.................................................... 3-63 Figure 3-30: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud..................................................... 3-67 Figure 3-31: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes .................................................. 3-67 Figure 3-32: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100 ...................................... 3-68 Figure 3-33: Identification of xRAP-100 connectors .................................................... 3-69 Figure 3-34: Installation of xRAP-100 circuit breakers ................................................ 3-70 Figure 3-35: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud ....................................................... 3-74 Figure 3-36: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes..................................................... 3-75 Figure 3-37: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG......................................... 3-75 Figure 3-38: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws ........................................ 3-77 Figure 3-39: RAP-BG front cover removal ................................................................... 3-78 Figure 3-40: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation ....................................................... 3-78 Figure 3-41: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ................................... 3-79 Figure 3-42: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud ............................................................ 3-82 Figure 3-43: RAP-4B with a grounding cable............................................................... 3-82 Figure 3-44: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes.............................................................. 3-83 Figure 3-45: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B.......................................... 3-83 Figure 3-46: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws.................................... 3-85 Figure 3-47: RAP-4B front cover removal.................................................................... 3-86 Figure 3-48: RAP-4B circuit breakers installation ........................................................ 3-86 Figure 3-49: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ................................... 3-87 Figure 3-50: Cable guide.............................................................................................. 3-88 Figure 3-51: Fiber guide............................................................................................... 3-88 Figure 3-52: Cable slack tray ....................................................................................... 3-89 Figure 3-53: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for above shelf installations.................. 3-90 Figure 3-54: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for under shelf installations .................. 3-90 Figure 3-55: Threading optical fibers in the FST.......................................................... 3-92 Figure 3-56: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF ............................................. 3-93 Figure 3-57: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-94 Figure 3-58: ODF open view........................................................................................ 3-94 Figure 3-59: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-95 Figure 3-60: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP ............................... 3-97 Figure 4-1: Typical ADR10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack....................... 4-2 Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two ADR10000 shelves in an ETSI A rack ............................................................................................................... 4-3 Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic ADR10000 shelves in 2200 mm ETSI A rack .................................................................................................... 4-4

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page vii

Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three ADR10000 shelves with TPUs in 2600 mm ETSI A rack ...................................................................................... 4-5 Figure 4-5: Typical ADR10000 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack........................... 4-6 Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view.............................................................................. 4-9 Figure 4-7: Typical ADR10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack..................... 4-11 Figure 4-8: Typical installation of ADR10000 and ADR30G shelves in an ETSI A rack ............................................................................................................. 4-13 Figure 4-9: Typical installation of ADR10000 shelves in an ETSI A rack ............................................................................................................. 4-14 Figure 4-10: Installing the vertical lower bracket.......................................................... 4-17 Figure 4-11: Preparing the filter frame assembly......................................................... 4-18 Figure 4-12: Installing the filter frame assembly .......................................................... 4-19 Figure 4-13: Installing the vertical upper bracket ......................................................... 4-20 Figure 4-14: Installing the thumbnuts........................................................................... 4-21 Figure 4-15: Releasing the thumbnuts......................................................................... 4-23 Figure 4-16: Lowering the filter frame .......................................................................... 4-24 Figure 4-17: Filter frame in lower position.................................................................... 4-25 Figure 4-18: Inserting the air filter ................................................................................ 4-26 Figure 4-19: ADR10000 shelf and rack grounding ...................................................... 4-28 Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU300 .................................................................................. 5-2 Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F............................ 5-3 Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC300 ................................................................................. 5-4 Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC300............................................................... 5-5 Figure 5-5: Installing a quad I/O card............................................................................. 5-7 Figure 5-6: Removing a module guide........................................................................... 5-9 Figure 5-7: Installing the quad I/O card right adapter .................................................. 5-10 Figure 5-8: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter....................................................... 5-10 Figure 5-9: Installing a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots ............................................... 5-11 Figure 5-10: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots ................................................... 5-14 Figure 5-11: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter ............................................ 5-15 Figure 5-12: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module............................. 5-17 Figure 5-13: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the ADR10000 .................. 5-19 Figure 5-14: Removing the module guide.................................................................... 5-20 Figure 5-15: Inserting the TC module (ADR10000) ..................................................... 5-22 Figure 5-16: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR10000)............................... 5-23 Figure 5-17: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR10000) ............................. 5-25 Figure 5-18: Removing a TPM guide ........................................................................... 5-26 Figure 5-19: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR10000) ................................ 5-27 Figure 5-20: Removing the TPU connector from the ADR10000 ................................ 5-30 Figure 5-21: Inserting the TPU connector onto the ADR10000................................... 5-30 Figure 5-22: Installing the pin guides in the TPU......................................................... 5-31 Figure 5-23: Lowering the TPU onto the ADR10000 ................................................... 5-31

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page viii

Figure 5-24: Securing the TPU onto the ADR10000 ................................................... 5-32 Figure 5-25: Installing the ADR10000 pin guides and removing the lower connector cover............................................................................................................ 5-33 Figure 5-26: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector ............................... 5-34 Figure 5-27: Lowering the ADR10000 onto the TPU ................................................... 5-35 Figure 5-28: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf ........................................................ 5-35 Figure 5-29: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the first TPU/OCU ............................................................................................................. 5-37 Figure 5-30: Installing the pin guides in the TPU......................................................... 5-37 Figure 5-31: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU in the ADR10000 .............................................................................................................5-38 Figure 5-32: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR10000 ............ 5-39 Figure 5-33: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR10000............. 5-39 Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack............................................... 6-2 Figure 6-2: PIM2_63S traffic cable ................................................................................ 6-8 Figure 6-3: PIM2_63S traffic cable installation ............................................................ 6-10 Figure 6-4: ADR10000 1:1 protection scheme example.............................................. 6-14 Figure 6-5: ADR10000 1:2 protection scheme example.............................................. 6-15 Figure 6-6: ADR10000 1_2 protection scheme example (PIM2_63S) ........................ 6-16 Figure 6-7: ADR10000 1:3 protection scheme example.............................................. 6-17 Figure 6-8: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in ADR10000................................. 6-18 Figure 6-9: ADR10000 1:3 protection scheme example.............................................. 6-19 Figure 6-10: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an ADR10000 ........................ 6-20 Figure 6-11: ADR10000 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections .......................... 6-21 Figure 6-12: RJ-45 extractor ........................................................................................ 6-26 Figure 6-13: Inserting the cables (upper row) .............................................................. 6-26 Figure 6-14: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row) ................................... 6-27 Figure 6-15: Extracting the connector (upper row) ...................................................... 6-27 Figure 6-16: Inserting the cables (lower row)............................................................... 6-28 Figure 6-17: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row).................................... 6-28 Figure 6-18: Extracting the connector (lower row)....................................................... 6-29 Figure 6-19: LC/SFP extractor ..................................................................................... 6-29 Figure 6-20: Inserting the fiber into the extractor ......................................................... 6-30 Figure 6-21: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip ..................................... 6-30 Figure 6-22: Extracting the LC connector .................................................................... 6-31 Figure 6-23: Moving the connector beyond the tab ..................................................... 6-31 Figure 6-24: Removing the fiber .................................................................................. 6-31 Figure 6-25: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end ......................................... 6-32 Figure 6-26: Moving extractor's end to the connector.................................................. 6-32 Figure 6-27: Inserting the connector into the SFP ....................................................... 6-32 Figure 6-28: Moving the extractor backward................................................................ 6-32 Figure 6-29: Removing the extractor from the fiber ..................................................... 6-33

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page ix

Figure 6-30: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP............................................... 6-33 Figure 6-31: Moving the extractor forward ................................................................... 6-33 Figure 6-32: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot ............................................... 6-34 Figure 6-33: Moving extractor toward SFP clip............................................................ 6-34 Figure 6-34: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip .................................... 6-34 Figure 6-35: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth............................... 6-35 Figure 6-36: Releasing the SFP from housing............................................................. 6-35 Figure 6-37: Extracting the SFP................................................................................... 6-35 Figure 6-38: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor ............................................................................... 6-36 Figure 6-39: Placing the extractor in front of the connector......................................... 6-37 Figure 6-40: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step ....................................... 6-37 Figure 6-41: Extracting the connector.......................................................................... 6-38 Figure 6-42: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor ........................................... 6-38 Figure 6-43: Positioning the connector in the extractor ............................................... 6-39 Figure 6-44: Inserting the connector ............................................................................ 6-39 Figure 6-45: Removing the extractor ........................................................................... 6-40 Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup ............................................................ 7-21 Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter .................................................................................... 8-5 Figure 8-2: ECU300/ECU300-F-F monitoring system interface .................................... 8-7 Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module ......................................... 8-8 Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module............................... 8-27 Figure 8-5: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers.................................................. 8-29 Figure 8-6: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers...................................................... 8-30 Figure A-1: ALARMS connector pin identification..........................................................A-2 Figure A-2: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification....................................................A-7 Figure A-3: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification............................A-8 Figure A-4: ETHERNET connectors pin identification ...................................................A-9 Figure A-5: POWER input power connector pin functions.............................................A-9 Figure A-6: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification.................................................A-10 Figure A-7: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification.................................................A-13 Figure A-8: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification.................................A-19 Figure A-9: PIM2_63S connector pin identification......................................................A-23 Figure A-10: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification .............................................A-31 Figure A-11: DC input power connectors pin functions ...............................................A-32 Figure A-12: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin identification..........................A-32 Figure A-13: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification .........................A-34 Figure A-14: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin identification .............................A-37 Figure A-15: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification.............................A-39 Figure A-16: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions......A-42 Figure A-17: SHELF alarm connector pin identification...............................................A-42 Figure A-18: ALARMS connector pin identification......................................................A-44

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xi

List of Tables Table 3-1: Equipment dimensions .......................................................................... 3-2 Table 3-2: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ....................................... 3-5 Table 3-3: Equipment rack data.............................................................................. 3-7 Table 3-4: Optical fibers and mating connector data............................................ 3-16 Table 3-5: EISM optical fibers and mating connector data................................... 3-17 Table 3-6: EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data ............ 3-17 Table 3-7: DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data .................................. 3-18 Table 3-8: DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data.............. 3-18 Table 3-9: MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data ................................ 3-18 Table 3-10: MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data ............ 3-19 Table 3-11: xRAP-D front panel component functions ........................................... 3-23 Table 3-12: xRAP-D connector functions ............................................................... 3-24 Table 3-13: xRAP-100 front panel component functions........................................ 3-26 Table 3-14: xRAP-100 connectors.......................................................................... 3-27 Table 3-15: RAP-BG front panel component functions .......................................... 3-28 Table 3-16: RAP-4B front panel component functions ........................................... 3-30 Table 3-17: RAP-4B connector functions ............................................................... 3-31 Table 3-18: RAP features ....................................................................................... 3-32 Table 3-19: Outline of ADR10000 horizontal installation sequence ....................... 3-37 Table 3-20: Outline of ADR10000 vertical installation sequence ........................... 3-40 Table 3-21: ADR10000 recommended circuit breakers ......................................... 3-71 Table 6-1: ADR10000 protection schemes........................................................... 6-13 Table 6-2: ADR10000 slots allocation for protection schemes............................. 6-14 Table 6-3: ADR10000 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63) ............................................ 6-15 Table 6-4: ADR10000 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63S).......................................... 6-16 Table 6-5: ADR10000 1:3 I/O protection .............................................................. 6-17 Table 6-6: TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the ADR10000............ 6-18 Table 7-1: Card and module inventory ................................................................... 7-3 Table 7-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks............................................. 7-4 Table 7-3: Measured optical levels ......................................................................... 7-5 Table 7-4: Traffic stability test time intervals ........................................................ 7-11 Table 7-5: Throughput and latency test results .................................................... 7-18 Table 7-6: Frame loss rate test procedure ........................................................... 7-18 Table 7-7: Frame loss rate test results ................................................................. 7-19 Table 7-8: BER and Stability Test time intervals .................................................. 7-26 Table 8-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks ................................... 8-2 Table 8-2: I/O modules monitoring data ............................................................... 8-10 Table 8-3: Troubleshooting power problems ........................................................ 8-13

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xii

Table 8-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules ..................... 8-14 Table 8-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins.. 8-15 Table 8-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules.............. 8-16 Table 8-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux........ 8-16 Table 8-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs............................................... 8-17 Table 8-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem ............................. 8-18 Table 8-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms................................. 8-19 Table 8-11: Troubleshooting management communication ................................... 8-20 Table A-1: ALARMS connector pin assignment......................................................A-3 Table A-2: ALARMS client cable wiring ..................................................................A-4 Table A-3: xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring ..............................................................A-5 Table A-4: F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment................................................A-7 Table A-5: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment........................A-8 Table A-6: ETHERNET connectors pin assignment ...............................................A-9 Table A-7: PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment ..................A-10 Table A-8: PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment..................A-12 Table A-9: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21) pin assignmentA-14 Table A-10: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42) pin assignmentA-16 Table A-11: PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment ...A-20 Table A-12: PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment ......A-21 Table A-13: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines ..............................................A-23 Table A-14: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines..............................................A-24 Table A-15: Connector P1 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines ............................................A-26 Table A-16: Connector P3 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Rx lines............................................A-27 Table A-17: Connector P1 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines ............................................A-28 Table A-18: Connector P3 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Rx lines............................................A-29 Table A-19: 10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment ...........................................A-31 Table A-20: 1000BaseT connector pin assignment ................................................A-31 Table A-21: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment........................A-32 Table A-22: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment .......................A-34 Table A-23: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment ...........................A-37 Table A-24: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment...........................A-39 Table A-25: SHELF alarm connector pin assignment.............................................A-42 Table A-26: ALARMS connector pin assignment....................................................A-45

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xiii

In this chapter: Overview ......................................................................................................... xiiiIntended Audience........................................................................................... xiiiDocument Organization................................................................................... xivDocument Conventions ................................................................................... xivRelated Documentation .................................................................................... xvObtaining Technical Documentation................................................................ xvTechnical Assistance ........................................................................................ xv

Overview The ADR10000 Installation and Maintenance Manual (IMM) describes how to set up, configure, and install ADR10000 shelves and their components and accessories.

The manual also provides task-oriented instructions for LED indications, troubleshooting hardware-related problems, and replacing hardware components (cards, modules, accessories).

Intended Audience This manual is intended for installation and other qualified service personnel responsible for installing the system and its accessories.

The instructions require you to understand and follow the safety practices included here, as well as any applicable national regulations and those enforced at your site. They also require that you understand the physical, optical, and electrical requirements of the installation site.

About This Manual

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xiv

Document Organization This manual contains the following information:

Installation

Maintenance

Additional functionality

Document Conventions When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions. Convention Indicates Example

Bold Names of windows, dialog boxes, menus, buttons, and most other GUI elements

On the Alarms menu.

Menu > Option Selection from a menu, or leading to another command

Select Update > View Objects

Italics New terms, emphasized text, and names of manuals and documents

Examples in text

Borders around text Notes, cautions, and warnings See examples below

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or interesting points of information.

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information.

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.

LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates how to avoid personal injury. All personnel involved in equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xv

connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.

ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on how to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent damage to the unit.

TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information and handy hints that can make your task easier.

IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential information to which you must pay attention.

Related Documentation The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information supplied in this installation manual in greater or lesser detail.

ADR30G – ADR10000 – ADR120G Reference Manual

EMS- ADR (Element Management System) User Manual

IONOS-NMS (Network Management System) User Manual

IEC Publication 825 – Laser Safety Requirements

Obtaining Technical Documentation

To obtain technical documentation related to the ADR120G or any other Sagemcom product, please contact:

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page xvi

Registered office: 250, route de l'Empereur, 92848 RUEIL MALMAISON CEDEX Tel.: +33 (0) 1 57 61 10 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 57 61 10 10 http://www.sagemcom.com

Technical Assistance The configuration, installation, and operation of the ADR 10000 and its operation in a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different nature of each installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this manual.

If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, SAGEMCOM maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel. The services of this group are available to customers at any time.

If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation plan from SAGEMCOM's Customer Support team, contact your SAGEMCOM sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic, contact the SAGEMCOM Customer Support center at your location or our central customer support center action line at:

Telephone 33 1 57 61 16 16

Telefax 33 1 57 61 16 60

CTAC web tickets

https://ctacsagemcom.dyndns.org/otrs/customer.pl

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page 1-1

In this chapter: Overview ......................................................................................................... 1-1Warning Definition.......................................................................................... 1-2Qualified Personnel Warning .......................................................................... 1-3Installation Warning ........................................................................................ 1-4General Safety Requirements .......................................................................... 1-5Jewelry Removal Warning .............................................................................. 1-6Grounding Requirements................................................................................. 1-7Power Supply Requirements ......................................................................... 1-10UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements .......................................... 1-15ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements .............................. 1-17Laser Safety Requirements ............................................................................ 1-19Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ................................................... 1-22Environmental and Health Concerns ............................................................. 1-27

Overview This chapter describes the ADR safety guidelines. The safety rules and warnings in this chapter must be read before beginning any platform installation or maintenance work. These safety guidelines must be adhered to carefully.

WARNING: ADR equipment (the "ADR equipment" or the "Equipment") is intended for installation in restricted access areas only.

1 Installing ADR10000: Before

You Start Safety Guidelines


WARNING: ADR equipment has two power sources. Disconnect both before servicing.

Before starting installation, make sure that the DC power is not connected to the rack, and that the circuit breakers in the xRAP or in the user-provided power distribution panel are set to OFF.

NOTE: This chapter includes translations of some of the warnings that appear in this guide. The translated warnings are presented with the English text first, followed by these languages:

Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish

Warning Definition

WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could result in severe bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the potential electrical hazards and become familiar with accident prevention measures.

ADVARSEL: Dette symbol betyder fare. Der er risiko for alvorlig legemsbeskadigelse. Vær opmærksom på potentielle elektriske risici, og sæt dig ind i forholdsreglerne til uheldsforebyggelse, før du arbejder på nogen form for udstyr.

WAARSCHUWING: Dit symbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die ernstig lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u met de apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van mogelijke elektriciteitsrisico’s en zich op de hoogte te stellen van maatregelen ter voorkoming van ongelukken.

VAROITUS: Tämä merkki tarkoittaa vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa vakavaan loukkaantumiseen. Ennen kuin käytät mitään laitetta, ota huomioon mahdolliset sähköiset vaaratekijät ja tutustu ennalta onnettomuuden ehkäisemisohjeisiin.


ATTENTION: Ce symbole est signe de danger. Vous risquez de graves blessures corporelles. Avant de travailler sur un appareil, vous devez avoir conscience des risques électriques encourus et vous familiariser avec les mesures de prévention des accidents.

WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu schwerwiegenden Verletzungen führen kann. Bedenken Sie vor dem Gebrauch der Geräte mögliche Gefahren durch elektrischen Strom und machen Sie sich mit den Maßnahmen zur Unfallverhütung vertraut.

AVVERTENZA: Questo simbolo indica una situazione di pericolo. Tale situazione potrebbe provocare gravi danni fisici. Prima di utilizzare qualsiasi dispositivo, fare attenzione ai potenziali rischi elettrici e acquisire familiarità con le eventuali misure di prevenzione.

AVISO: Este símbolo significa perigo. Encontra-se numa situação em que a sua saúde corre sérios riscos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com o equipamento, verifique o risco potencial de choque eléctrico e familiarize-se com as medidas de prevenção de acidente.

ADVERTENCIA: Este símbolo significa peligro. Está expuesto a sufrir daños corporales serios. Antes de utilizar el equipo, tenga en cuenta la posibilidad de riesgo eléctrico potencial y lea atentamente las medidas de prevención de accidentes.

VARNING: Denna symbol betyder livsfara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till allvarliga kroppsskador. Innan du arbetar med utrustningen måste du vara medveten om potentiella faror och känna till olycksförebyggande åtgärder.

Qualified Personnel Warning

WARNING: Only trained qualified personnel must install, maintain, or replace the equipment.

ADVARSEL: Kun uddannet, kvalificeret personale må installere, vedligeholde eller udskifte udstyr.

WAARSCHUWING: Installatie, onderhoud of vervanging van de apparatuur mag uitsluitend worden uitgevoerd door opgeleid en bevoegd personeel.

VAROITUS: Vain koulutettu, pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa, ylläpitää tai vaihtaa laitteella.

ATTENTION: Seules des personnes formées et qualifiées sont


habilitées à installer, entretenir ou changer l’équipement.

WARNUNG: Nur geschultes, qualifiziertes Personal sollte den Ausrüstung installieren, warten oder ersetzen.

AVVERTENZA: Il apparecchiature può essere installato, controllato o sostituito solo da personale qualificato.

AVISO: Só pessoal especializado e qualificado deve instalar, fazer a manutenção ou substituir o equipamento.

ADVERTENCIA: La instalación, el mantenimiento y la sustitución de este equipo sólo deberá realizarlo personal cualificado.

VARNING: Endast utbildad, kvalificerad personal får installera, underhålla eller ersätta utrustning.

Installation Warning

WARNING: Before you connect the equipment to a power source, read the installation information in this guide.

ADVARSEL: Gennemlæs installationsoplysningerne i denne vejledning, før udstyr sluttes til en strømkilde.

WAARSCHUWING: Lees de aanwijzingen voor de installatie in deze handleiding voordat u de apparatuur aansluit op een voedingsbron.

VAROITUS: Ennen kuin liität laitteella virtalähteeseen, lue asennusohjeet tästä oppaasta.

ATTENTION: Avant de brancher l’équipement à une source d'alimentation, lisez les instructions d'installation de ce manuel.

WARNUNG: Lesen Sie die Hinweise zur Installation in diesem Handbuch, bevor Sie den Ausrüstung an eine Stromquelle anschließen.

AVVERTENZA: Prima di collegare il apparecchiature alla presa di alimentazione, leggere le informazioni relative all'installazione riportate in questa guida.

AVISO: Antes de ligar o equipamento a uma fonte de energia, leia as instruções para instalação neste guia.

ADVERTENCIA: Antes de conectar el equipo a la fuente de alimentación, lea la información sobre instalación en esta guía.


VARNING: Innan du ansluter utrustning till en strömkälla ska du läsa installationsinformationen i denna handbok.

General Safety Requirements ADR platforms contain power sources of varying voltages. Make sure to install the platforms in compliance with the following guidelines:

Use the equipment in restricted access locations only.

Note that the equipment racks and ADR platforms are suitable for mounting on concrete or other noncombustible surfaces only.

Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections.

ADR platforms must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

Sufficient lighting is available while working on the equipment.

Do not work on any equipment connected to a voltage source (DC or AC), except for inserting/removing cards or modules (these activities can be performed on operating equipment).

Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 50°C.

Use only insulated tools during installation.

Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations.

Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for example, electrical tributaries) during thunderstorms.

Avoid contact with high voltage sources when installing platforms, cards, and modules.

Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels affixed to the equipment, and strictly observe the procedures to avoid the indicated hazards.


Jewelry Removal Warning

WARNING: Before you work on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove all jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). When connected to power and ground, metal objects may heat up and cause serious burns, or weld the objects to the terminals.

ADVARSEL: Før du arbejder på udstyr, der er sluttet til strømledninger, skal du tage evt. smykker af (f.eks. ringe, halskæder og ure). Ved tilslutning til strøm og jord kan metalobjekter blive varme og forårsage alvorlige forbrændinger, eller objekterne kan blive svejset fast til terminalerne.

WAARSCHUWING: Voordat u aan apparatuur gaat werken die met elektrische leidingen is verbonden, dient u sieraden (zoals ringen, kettingen en horloges) af te doen. Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer deze met stroom en aarde verbonden zijn en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen vastlassen.

VAROITUS: Ennen kuin työskentelet laitteella, joka on kytketty virtajohtoihin, riisu kaikki korut (mukaanlukien sormukset, kaulanauhat ja rannekellot). Ollessaan kosketuksissa sekä sähkövirtaan että maahan, metalliesineet saattavat kuumentua ja aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsautua kiinni napoihin.

ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur un équipement connecté au secteur, enlevez tous vos bijoux (y compris les bagues, les colliers et les montres). Lorsque vous êtes connecté au secteur et à la masse, les objets métalliques peuvent chauffer et causer de sérieuses brûlures ou se souder à l'appareil.

WARNUNG: Legen Sie jeglichen Schmuck (wie Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) ab, bevor Sie bei bestehender Stromzufuhr an dem Gerät arbeiten. Wenn eine Verbindung zur Stromversorgung und zur Masse besteht, können sich Gegenstände aus Metall erhitzen und Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlüsse angeschweißt werden.

AVVERTENZA: Prima di utilizzare apparecchiature collegate all'alimentazione, togliersi anelli, collane e orologi e altri oggetti. Dopo aver eseguito il collegamento all'alimentazione e la messa a terra, tali oggetti metallici possono riscaldarsi e provocare la fusione di oggetti sui terminali.

AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que estiver ligado à corrente eléctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia (tais como anéis, colares e relógios). Quando estão ligados à corrente e à terra, os objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves queimaduras ou até mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente.


ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar con un equipo que esté conectado a la alimentación, deberá uitarse todas las joyas que lleve (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos metálicos que estén conectados a la alimentación y a una toma de tierra, se podrían calentar y causar quemaduras graves o soldar objetos a los terminales.

VARNING: Innan du utför arbete på utrustning som är ansluten till nätsladdar ska du ta av smycken (inkl. ringar, halsband och klockor). När apparaten är ansluten till ström och jord kan metallföremål bli heta och orsaka allvarliga brännskador eller svetsa fast föremålen till terminalerna.

Grounding Requirements All equipment, including ADR platforms, ancillary units, and equipment from other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise, and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.

Proper operation of the ADR equipment requires that the positive supply line be connected to the common ground (CGND) of the site at the power source, in accordance with ETS300132-2.

WARNING: When installing the equipment, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

ADVARSEL: Når udstyr installeres, skal jordledningen altid monteres først og afmonteres sidst.

WAARSCHUWING: Bij het installeren van de apparatuur moet de aarde als eerste worden aangesloten en als laatste worden afgekoppeld.

VAROITUS: Kun reititintä asennetaan, maaliitäntä pitää aina tehdä ensin ja laitteella viimeisenä.

ATTENTION: Lors de l'installation des équipements, la mise à la terre doit toujours être effectuée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.

WARNUNG: Bei der Installation des Ausrüstung muss der Masseleiter stets zuerst angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt werden.

AVVERTENZA: Durante l'installazione del apparecchiature, la connessione a terra deve essere eseguita per prima e disconnessa per ultima.

AVISO: Ao instalar o equipamento, a ligação à terra deve ser sempre a


primeira a ser ligada e a última a ser desligada.

ADVERTENCIA: Al instalar el equipo, la conexión de tierra se deberá hacer en primer lugar y se deberá desconectar en último lugar.

VARNING: När du installerar utrustning måste jordsladden kopplas in först och kopplas ur sist.

Rack Grounding Requirements

The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt ('grounding stud') welded to the rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol label. The stud must be free of paint. The rack also has a rack grounding bar, which includes a set of connection points for grounding all the equipment used in the rack. The following figure highlights the rack grounding stud and rack grounding bar on an optical rack.

Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post


A connection must be made between the rack grounding bar and the site grounding bar in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations. For example, grounding may be completed by means of a copper cable with green/yellow insulation of the same diameter as the power feeding cables (or thicker), and as short as possible. A length of appropriate 50 mm2 grounding cable is included with the platform accessories. As long as the grounding connection is in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations, a different connection bar may also be used. The rack grounding stud is connected to the rack grounding bar by means of a metal panel. These rack grounding connections are highlighted in the following figure.

Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar

Equipment Grounding Requirements

Each equipment unit mounted on the rack is grounded to the rack frame by the retaining bolts and nuts attaching the unit to the rack frame.

Equipment grounding is performed via the mounting brackets to the rack rails. The mounting bracket's internal surface facing the rails and the equipment must be free of paint and provide electrical continuity to the equipment frame. Check that the resistance between any mounting bracket and the equipment frame (chassis) is lower than 0.1 Ω.


WARNING: To prevent possible damage to ADR equipment, all racks and equipment must be completely grounded before connecting any external devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V) to the platform. All grounding procedures described in Grounding the ADR10000 Platform must be completed before, for example, connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the network element (NE) management system.

Power Supply Requirements

Connection via RAP

ADR platforms require two power sources with nominal voltage of -48 VDC ranging to -72 VDC, with the positive line connected to the site ground.

Each power source must be protected by a UL-listed circuit breaker installed in the RAP. These circuit breakers are included in the installation kit supplied with the equipment, and their current ratings are therefore in accordance with the order.

In addition, the site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed disconnect device incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. The device limits the maximum delivered current to a safe value.


DC Power Warnings

WARNING: Follow this wiring sequence when connecting power: ground to ground, positive lead to +RTN terminal, and negative lead to -48 V terminal. To disconnect power, perform the sequence in reverse order. Always connect the ground wire first and disconnect it last.

ADVARSEL: Ledningsføring ved strømtilslutning: Jord til jord, positiv ledning til +RTN-terminalen og negativ ledning til -48V-terminalen. Foretag dette i omvendt rækkefølge ved frakobling af strømmen. Jordledningen skal altid monteres først og afmonteres sidst.

WAARSCHUWING: Houd u bij het aansluiten van de stroom aan de volgende bedradingsvolgorde: aarde naar aarde, de positieve draad naar de klem +RTN en de negatieve draad naar de klem -48 V. Voor het afkoppelen past u de omgekeerde volgorde toe. De aarddraad moet altijd het eerst worden aangesloten en het laatst worden afgekoppeld.

VAROITUS: Noudata seuraavaa johdotusjärjestystä kytkiessäsi virtaa: maasta maahan, positiivinen johdin +RTN-napaan ja negatiivinen johdin -48 V -napaan. Tee edellinen käänteisessä järjestyksessä, kun olet katkaisemassa virtaa. Maajohto tulisi aina kytkeä ensimmäisenä kiinni ja viimeisenä pois.

ATTENTION: Lorsque vous vous connectez au secteur, suivez les instructions suivantes : terre à la terre, câble positif vers connexion +RTN et câble négatif vers connexion –48V. Suivez ces instructions dans l'ordre inverse pour vous déconnecter du secteur. Le câble à la terre doit toujours être connecté en premier et déconnecté en dernier.

WARNUNG: Beachten Sie beim Anschluss an das Stromnetz folgende Reihenfolge der Verkabelung: Masseleiter an Masseanschluss, positiver Pol an +RTN-Anschluss und negativer Pol an -48 V-Anschluss. Verwenden Sie bei der Unterbrechung der Stromversorgung die umgekehrte Reihenfolge. Der Masseleiter sollte immer zuerst angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt werden.

AVVERTENZA: Quando si collega il router alla presa di alimentazione, seguire la sequenza di fili elettrici indicata di seguito: terra a terra, polo positivo sul terminale +RTN e polo negativo sul terminale -48 V. Per scollegare il router dalla presa di alimentazione, seguire la sequenza nell'ordine inverso. Il filo della terra deve essere sempre collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.

AVISO: Ao ligar a corrente eléctrica, observar a seguinte sequência de cablagem: fio de terra a fio de terra, pólo positivo com terminal +RTN, e pólo negativo com terminal -48 V. Para desligar a corrente, executar a sequência em ordem inversa. O fio de terra deve ser sempre ligado em primeiro lugar e desligado em último lugar.

ADVERTENCIA: Cuando conecte la alimentación, siga la secuencia de cableado que se indica a continuación: tierra a tierra, toma positiva a terminal +RTN, y toma negativa a terminal -48 V. Para desconectar la


alimentación, realice la secuencia en orden inverso. La toma de tierra siempre deberá conectarse en primer lugar y desconectarse en último.

VARNING: När du ansluter strömmen ska du följa denna sekvens: jord till jord, positiv sladd till +RTN-terminalen och negativ sladd till -48 V-terminalen. Utför dessa steg i motsatt ordning när du kopplar från strömmen. Jordsladden bör alltid kopplas in först och kopplas ur sist.

WARNING: Ensure the DC input wiring is connected in the correct polarity, as reversed polarity may trip the circuit breaker or damage the equipment.

ADVARSEL: Kontrollér, at jævnstrømstilførselsledningen er tilsluttet med korrekt polaritet, da omvendt polaritet kan udløse brydekontakten eller beskadige udstyr.

WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de ingangsbedrading voor gelijkstroom is aangesloten op de juiste polariteit, aangezien omgekeerde polariteit de stroomonderbreker kan uitschakelen of de apparatuur kan beschadigen.

VAROITUS: Varmista, että tasavirran syöttöjohdotus on kytketty oikeisiin napoihin, sillä vastakkainen napaisuus saattaa suojalaukaista katkaisijan (tripata) tai aiheuttaa vahinkoa laitteella.

ATTENTION: Assurez vous que le câble de l'entrée de courant continu se trouve dans la bonne polarité, sinon vous risquez d'allumer le disjoncteur ou d'endommager l'équipements.

WARNUNG: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Gleichstromkabel an die richtige Polarität angeschlossen ist. Andernfalls kann der Trennschalter ausgeschaltet oder der Ausrüstung beschädigt werden.

AVVERTENZA: Assicurarsi che i fili CC siano collegati alla polarità corretta, in caso contrario può scattare l'interruttore automatico o si può danneggiare il apparecchiature.

AVISO: Certifique-se de que a ligação de entrada de corrente é feita com a polaridade adequada, pois a polaridade invertida pode fazer com que o circuito dispare ou danificar o equipamento.

ADVERTENCIA: Asegúrese de que el cable de entrada de CC está conectado con la polaridad adecuada ya que la polaridad contraria podría provocar un cortacircuitos o dañar el equipo.

VARNING: Kontrollera att ingångssladdarna för likström är anslutna till rätt pol. Fel pol kan leda till att strömbrytaren stängs av eller att utrustning skadas.

WARNING: When stranded wiring is used, make sure that no “stray” strands protrude from the DC power entry terminals.

ADVARSEL: Når der bruges flertrådede ledninger, skal det


kontrolleres, at der ikke stikker tråde ud af stikkene.

WAARSCHUWING: Wanneer er geslagen bedrading wordt gebruikt, moet u ervoor zorgen dat er geen ‘lekdraden’ uit de gelijkstroomingangsklemmen steken.

VAROITUS: Jos käytetään johdotusta, jossa on säikeitä, varmista, ettei yksikään säie harota tasavirran syöttönavoista.

ATTENTION: Lorsque vous utilisez des câbles toronnés, assurez vous qu'aucun brin ne dépasse des entrées de courant continu.

WARNUNG: Achten Sie bei verseilten Kabeln darauf, dass keine Litzen aus den Gleichstromanschlüssen hervorstehen.

AVVERTENZA: Se si utilizzano cavi a connettori multipli, assicurarsi che nessun cavo sporga dai terminali dell'alimentazione CC.

AVISO: Quando for utilizado fio entrançado, certifique-se que não ficam pontas soltas aparentes nos terminais de entrada de energia de CC.

ADVERTENCIA: Si se utiliza cable trenzado, asegúrese de que no se ha salido ningún hilo de los terminales de entrada de CC.

VARNING: Om du använder tvinnade kablar ska du kontrollera att inga lösa filament sticker ut från ingångsterminalerna för likström.

WARNING: Before working on the equipment or near the power entries, ensure that the power cables have been disconnected from both DC power entry terminals. Do not touch the DC power entries while the power cables are connected. Voltages may be present within the power entries when the power is switched off and the power cables are connected.

ADVARSEL: Før der arbejdes på udstyr eller nær strømindgangene, skal det kontrolleres, at ledningerne er taget ud af begge strømtilførsler. Rør ikke ved strømtilførslerne, mens ledningerne er tilsluttet. Der kan være spænding i strømtilførslerne, når der er slukket for strømmen, og strømledningerne er tilsluttet.

WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de stroomkabels zijn afgekoppeld van beide gelijkstroomingangen, voordat u aan de apparatuur of in de buurt van de stroomingangen gaat werken. Raak de gelijkstroomingangen niet aan terwijl de stroomkabels worden aangesloten. De stroomingangen kunnen onder spanning staan wanneer de stroom wordt uitgeschakeld en de stroomkabels worden aangesloten.

VAROITUS: Ennen laitteella tai sen virtalähteiden lähellä työskentelyä varmista, että virtakaapelit on irrotettu molemmista tasavirran syöttönavoista. Älä koske tasavirran syöttökohtiin kun virtakaapelit on kytketty kiinni. Virransyöttökohdissa saattaa olla vielä jännitettä silloin, kun virta on kytketty pois ja virtakaapelit ovat kiinni.

ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur l'équipements ou près de ses


entrées électriques, assurez-vous que les câbles d'alimentation sont déconnectés des deux entrées de courant continu. Ne touchez pas les entrées de courant continu lorsque les câbles d'alimentation sont connectés. Il risque d'y avoir encore du courant dans les entrées d'alimentation lorsque l'interrupteur est éteint et que les câbles sont connectés.

WARNUNG: Entfernen Sie vor allen Arbeiten am Ausrüstung oder nahe der Stromanschlüsse die Stromkabel aus beiden Gleichstromanschlüssen. Berühren Sie die Gleichstromeingänge nicht, wenn die Stromkabel angeschlossen sind. An den Stromeingängen können Spannungen anliegen, wenn die Stromzufuhr unterbrochen ist und die Stromkabel angeschlossen sind.

AVVERTENZA: Prima di eseguire interventi sul apparecchiature o di avvicinarsi agli ingressi della corrente, assicurarsi che i cavi dell'alimentazione siano stati scollegati da entrambi i terminali dell'alimentazione CC. Non avvicinarsi agli ingressi dell'alimentazione CC mentre i cavi dell'alimentazione sono collegati. È possibile che la tensione sia presente negli ingressi quando l'alimentazione è scollegata ma i cavi sono collegati.

AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que estiver ligado à corrente eléctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia (tais como anéis, colares e relógios). Quando estão ligados à corrente e à terra, os objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves queimaduras ou até mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente.

ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar en el equipo o cerca de las entradas de alimentación, compruebe que los cables de alimentación están desconectados de los dos terminales de entrada de CC. No toque las entradas de CC mientras que los cables de alimentación estén conectados. Es posible que haya corriente en las entradas de alimentación cuando el equipo esté apagado y los cables de alimentación estén conectados.

VARNING: Innan du arbetar med utrustning eller i närheten av strömingångarna ska du kontrollera att nätsladdarna har kopplats ur från båda ingångsterminalerna för likström. Rör inte ingångsterminalerna för likström när nätsladdarna är inkopplade. Det kan finnas ström kvar i strömingångarna när strömmen är av och nätsladdarna är inkopplade.

Electricity Safety Warning

WARNING: Do not touch uninsulated wiring or ports when they have not been disconnected from a power source; doing so may result in electrical shock.


ADVARSEL: Rør ikke ved uisolerede ledninger eller porte, når de ikke er koblet fra strømkilden, da det kan medføre elektrisk stød.

WAARSCHUWING: Raak geen ongeïsoleerde bedrading of poorten aan wanneer deze niet zijn afgekoppeld van de voeding, aangezien dit een elektrische schok kan veroorzaken.

VAROITUS: Älä koske eristämättömiin johtoihin tai napoihin, jos ne ovat kytköksissä virtalähteeseen, sillä tästä voi seurata sähköisku.

ATTENTION: Ne touchez pas les câbles ou ports non isolés lorsqu'ils ne sont pas déconnectés du secteur, car vous risquez de vous électrocuter.

WARNUNG: Berühren Sie keine unisolierten Kabel oder Anschlüsse, wenn sie noch an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen sind, da dies zu einem Stromschlag führen könnte.

AVVERTENZA: Evitare di toccare i cavi o le porte non isolate quando sono ancora collegati alla presa di alimentazione, poiché si potrebbero verificare scosse elettriche.

AVISO: Não tocar na cablagem aparente ou nas portas de entrada de corrente que não tiverem sido desligadas da fonte de energia, pois desse facto podem resultar choques eléctricos.

ADVERTENCIA: No toque los puertos ni los cables que no estén aislados si no están desconectados de la fuente de alimentación ya que podría provocar una descarga eléctrica.

VARNING: Rör inte sladdar eller portar som inte är isolerade om de inte har kopplats ur från strömkällan. Det kan leda till elektriska stötar.

UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements

This section outlines the UL/TUV statutory warnings and requirements applicable to ADR platforms.

Identification of TUV CE Listing

ADR10000 shelves are TUV CE-listed. The following is a typical TUV CE label for ADR10000 shelves.

Figure 1-3: ADR10000 TUV CE label

ADR10000


Warning Label

The following warning label is affixed alongside the ADR power input connectors and the RAP circuit breakers.

Figure 1-4: Power input warning label

CAUTION: ADR equipment has two power sources. Disconnect both before servicing.

UL/TUV Overcurrent Protection Requirements

NOTE: Rating and type of overcurrent protection are according to Classification Level 5 (L5) for power supplies having output circuits that meet the requirements for SELV circuits.

WARNING: Observe the following precautions when replacing circuit breakers:

Replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and rating.

Disconnect power before changing a circuit breaker.

ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromettre la protection contre les risques d’incendie, remplacer par un fusible de même type et de mêmes caractéristiques nominales.

UL/TUV Equipment Grounding Requirements

CAUTION: The equipment must have a connection between the grounded conductor of the DC power supply circuit and the equipment grounding conductor.

Connect the equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode is connected.


Locate the equipment in the same immediate area (for example, in adjacent racks) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounding conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and as the grounding point of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere.

Position the DC supply source in the same premises as this equipment.

There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.

UL/TUV Grounded Conductors Requirements

Connect the equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected.

Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the equipment. There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.

ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements

This section outlines the ITU-T and Telcordia statutory warnings and requirements applicable to ADR platforms. The source for these requirements can be found in IEC 60950-1/3.2.1.2.

DC Supply Circuit Connection to the Grounding Conductor

WARNING: There must be a connection between the grounded conductor of the DC power supply circuit and the equipment grounding conductor. See installation instructions for more details.

When this connection is made, all the following conditions must be met:

The equipment is connected directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar/bus to which the DC supply system


grounding electrode is connected.

The equipment is located in the same immediate area (such as adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere.

The DC supply source is located within the same premises as this equipment.

There is no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.

WARNING: Cet appareil est conçu pour permettre le raccordement du conducteur relié à la terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. au conducteur de terre de l’appareil.

Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent être respectées:

Ce matériel doit être raccordé directement au conducteur de la prise de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. ou à une tresse de mise à la masse reliée à une barre omnibus de terre laquelle est raccordée à l’électrode de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c.

Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont raccordés au conducteur de terre du même circuit d’alimentation c.c. doivent être installés à proximité les uns des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires adjacentes) et à proximité de la prise de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. Le circuit d’alimentation c.c. ne doit comporter aucune autre prise de terre.

La source d’alimentation du circuit c.c. doit être située dans la même pièce que le matériel.

Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur de la source d’alimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement à la prise de terre.

Ethernet Port Precautions


WARNINGS:

Ethernet ports must be cabled with shielded cables and the shield grounded at both ends.

Intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are suitable for connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. Intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be connected metallically to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Laser Safety Requirements

Laser Classification

SAGEMCOM equipment and components equipped with laser devices described in this manual comply with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards, including IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60825-2 (AS/NZS 2211.2) - Safety of Laser Products.

Except for certain high power optical amplifiers, ADR equipment is classified as Class 1 laser products. The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light and the beam is totally enclosed during normal operating modes of customer operation. As long as the equipment is operated in accordance with the applicable safety instructions, the Hazard Level in equipment access locations is inherently Class 1M or lower.

The high power EDFA and Raman optical amplifiers are also classified as Class 1M (or lower) laser products. However, note that these units emit power within Hazard Level 3B and Hazard Level 4. The hazard level might be higher than the product class, depending on network implementation and fiber accessibility.

SAGEMCOM provides product and installation information so that the products may be installed and serviced safely.

Laser Information

See the ADR System Specification for information regarding the laser transmitters of the various optical cards.


Warning Labels for Laser Products

The following labels are affixed near the optical connectors of optical cards and modules to indicate that the product is classified as a Class 1 laser product.

The following labels are affixed near the optical connectors of optical cards and modules with a laser to indicate that the product is classified as a Class 1M laser product.

Laser Safety Statutory Warning

All personnel involved in equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Although protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.

Remember that observing safety precautions is not a matter of personal choice; ignoring safety puts all the people within line of sight in danger!

Training for Laser Safety

Personnel must be trained for safety before being authorized to operate, install, and/or maintain laser products. The IEC 60825 (AS/NZS 2211.2) standards require organizations to appoint a laser safety officer who is responsible for training personnel, establishing safe operational procedures, and supervising the implementation of these procedures during routine work.

Untrained personnel must not be allowed to operate, install, and/or maintain laser products.


Laser Device Operating Precautions

In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in bodily injury and damage to equipment.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Protection goggles with nominal OD2 for the wavelength range of 1300 nm to 1600 nm are recommended. Protection goggles are mandatory for tasks performed on equipment with up to 30 dBm optical power lasers.

Hot insertion or swapping of a DWDM module or optical interface module must be carried out only by authorized personnel.

During hot removal and insertion of a fiber termination, avoid looking into the fiber to prevent irremediable damage to your eyes.

Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber terminations not currently in use.

Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures associated with the laser device other than those specified herein.

Only SAGEMCOM authorized service technicians must repair the unit.

To avoid potential fiber fusing, burnt connectors, or loss of laser power, ensure all high power connections are clean before you power on the optical amplifier.

It is strictly forbidden to override any protective devices and interlocks used to prevent direct exposure to the laser beam.

WARNING: Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of optical ports when no fiber cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open apertures.

ADVARSEL: Der kan forekomme usynlige laserstråler fra de optiske portes åbninger, når der ikke er tilsluttet et lyslederkabel. Undgå at blive udsat for disse stråler, og kig ikke ind i åbninger.

WAARSCHUWING: Er kan onzichtbare laserstraling uit de opening van de optische poorten komen wanneer er geen fiberkabel is aangesloten. Vermijd blootstelling aan straling en kijk niet in de openingen.

VAROITUS: Optisten porttien aukoista saattaa säteillä näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä silloin, kun niissä ei ole kuitukaapeleita kiinni. Vältä altistumista ja älä tuijota näihin avoimiin aukkoihin.


ATTENTION: Un rayonnement laser invisible peut être émis à partir de l'ouverture des ports optiques lorsque aucun câble à fibres optiques n'est connecté. Évitez de vous y exposer et ne fixez pas les ouvertures.

WARNUNG: Wenn kein Faserkabel angeschlossen ist, können aus der Öffnung der optischen Anschlüsse Laserstrahlen austreten. Vermeiden Sie Bestrahlungen und schauen Sie nicht in diese Öffnungen.

AVVERTENZA: Le aperture delle porte ottiche possono emettere radiazioni laser invisibili quando i cavi in fibra non sono collegati. Evitare lunghe esposizioni davanti alle aperture.

AVISO: Podem ser emitidas radiações invisíveis de laser a partir das aberturas das portas ópticas se não estiver ligado qualquer cabo de fibra óptica. Evitar a exposição e não olhar directamente pelas aberturas aparentes.

ADVERTENCIA: Es posible que la radiación láser invisible se emita desde la apertura de puertos ópticos cuando no haya ningún cable de fibra conectado. Evite la exposición y no mire fijamente a las aberturas.

VARNING: Osynlig laserstrålning kan spridas från öppningen på optiska portar om ingen fiberoptikkabel är ansluten. Undvik exponering och stirra inte in i öppningarna.

Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge

This section provides guidelines for protecting ADR equipment and its components against damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD) during handling, packaging/unpackaging, transportation, installation, commissioning, inspection, servicing, and maintenance activities.

Items sensitive to ESD are identified by the basic ESD warning symbol shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-5: Basic ESD warning symbol


The information in this section presents generally accepted workmanship practices and procedures that, when properly applied, minimize the probability of electrostatic damage to ADR equipment and its components.

The information is also in line with CENELEC Electronic Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015 that deals with protection of devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESDS devices).

General

Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be damaged by ESDs. An ESD between two objects occurs when an object carrying static electrical charges touches, or is brought near the other object.

Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be induced by electrical fields. Routine activities, such as walking across an insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and so on, can easily build up charges to levels that may cause damage, especially when humidity is low.

In many cases, the buildup of charges can be avoided by using special materials, for example, garments and packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistivity but are not insulators.

The best approach to avoiding damage by ESD includes a combination of means and procedures that:

Avoids build-up of electrostatic charges

Creates a protected work environment preventing ESD

Provides means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic charges when entering the protected work environment

NOTE: An area in which ESDS devices can be handled with minimum risk of damage and in which the operator is not exposed to additional risks, is called an ESD Protected Area (EPA).

Personnel Training

During production and assembly, equipment is handled in work spaces especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in many cases, the environment in which the same equipment is installed or maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled boundary.


Therefore, all the work requiring the handling of unprotected ESDS devices must be considered as field work.

Field work in this context includes activities such as service and maintenance, installation, site inspection, and commissioning of components and assemblies classified as ESDS, together with the packing and unpacking associated with such activities.

All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform these tasks in the same way as work performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material quality and personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packaging.

Use of Temporary EPA

Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. A typical temporary EPA arrangement suitable for field work on ADR10000 equipment is shown in the following figure. The EPA tool kit includes:

Wrist strap with 1 M Ω series resistor

Bonding strap with 1 M Ω series resistor

ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum

The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.

CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a way that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used, and prevents any sudden changes in potential within the EPA that could cause unacceptable voltages or discharges to be applied to ESDS devices.


Figure 1-6: ADR10000 typical temporary EPA arrangement


Work Arrangements within a Temporary EPA

To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field work within a temporary EPA:

All operators must wear, as a minimum, an antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.

If the operator needs to walk and move within the area, the floor must be capable of providing protection against ESD.

The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling an ESDS device.

If an ESDS device must be removed from equipment and transferred to a temporary work surface away from the equipment, it must be given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding of the operator to ground is maintained.

An ESDS device must be placed directly into protective packaging upon removal from equipment. A replacement ESDS device must be kept in its protective packaging until required for immediate installation in the equipment.

The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at service time.

All tools intended for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be so constructed that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.


Environmental and Health Concerns

SAGEMCOM is committed to achieving high standards of environmental quality and product safety.

The International Standardization Organization (ISO) has developed the internationally recognized standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. These are quality management standards that are administered by independent accreditation and certification bodies.

ISO 9000 is a family of standards for quality management systems that has been accepted as a model when assessing the adequacy of quality management systems. Some of the requirements in ISO 9001 (one of the standards in the ISO 9000 family) include:

Procedures that cover all key business processes

Process monitoring to ensure effectiveness

Adequate record-keeping

Monitoring output for defects, with appropriate and corrective action where necessary

Regular review of individual processes and the complete quality system as a whole

Facilitating continual improvement

ISO 14000 is the international specification for an Environmental Management System (EMS). It specifies requirements for establishing an environmental policy, determining environmental aspects and impacts of products, activities, and services, planning environmental objectives and measurable targets, implementation and operation of programs to meet objectives and targets, checking and corrective action, and management review. SAGEMCOM Quality and Environmental Management Systems were certified to these ISO standards and are periodically audited by third-party organizations.

SAGEMCOM policies and products meet the spirit of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Design for the Environment (DfE) Program to reduce risk to people and the environment by preventing pollution and improving energy efficiency.


As a part of SAGEMCOM’s environmental commitment and in pursuit of compliance with applicable environmental legislation, SAGEMCOM makes every effort to ensure that its products supplied to the EU market are compliant with the RoHS Europe directive restricting use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. SAGEMCOM also requires RoHS compliance from all its suppliers. All new electrical and electronic equipment delivered to locations within the EU do not contain any cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), hexavalent chromium compounds (Cr6+), mercury (Hg), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB), or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE), subject to certain exemptions and limitations as outlined in the RoHS directive.

Without limiting the generality of the preceding statement, we wish to stress that use of lead in solders in network infrastructure equipment has been exempted by the RoHS directive and may be found in certain SAGEMCOM products.

All equipment delivered to locations within the EU complies with the requirements of the RoHS Europe directive. Similarly, SAGEMCOM equipment is compliant with the RoHS California directive and RoHS Chinese directive where relevant. All SAGEMCOM equipment included in the Electronic Information Products (EIP) category includes a table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements, verifying hazardous substance levels in accordance with the RoHS China directive. Equipment documentation includes the appropriate Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) lifespan symbol indicating the point in time when the equipment may be expected to enter the recycling system. The following are examples of these pollution control symbols.

Figure 1-7: Pollution control logos

NOTE: The number in Logo 2 is for illustrative purposes only. When in actual use, the number indicates the corresponding environmental protection use period of the product.


SAGEMCOM adheres to the Waste Electrical and Electronic equipment (WEEE) directive requiring that all new products introduced into the EU market be labeled with the crossed-out wheeled bin recycling symbol defined by CENELEC standard EN 50419 and accepted by the member states. Note that specific WEEE procedures may differ from state to state, depending on the local implementation of the WEEE requirements.

Figure 1-8: WEEE recycling symbol

Do not dispose of SAGEMCOM equipment and accessories together with standard household waste. Check with SAGEMCOM technical support for information about product disposal, including recycling and reuse. For more information about SAGEMCOM's environmental, healths, and safety policy, see the quality policy pages on the SAGEMCOM website.

For any further information regarding SAGEMCOM's environmental and safety policies, please contact technical support.

WARNING: The ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to national laws and regulations.

ADVARSEL: Endelig bortskaffelse af dette produkt skal ske i overensstemmelse med nationale love og regler.

WAARSCHUWING: Dit product dient overeenkomstig de nationale wetgeving en voorschriften te worden weggegooid.

VAROITUS: Tämän tuotteen lopullinen hävittäminen tulee tehdä kansallisten lakien ja asetusten mukaisesti.

ATTENTION: La mise au rebut de ce produit devrait se faire conformément aux lois et réglementations de chaque pays.

WARNUNG: Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt entsprechend den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften.

AVVERTENZA: L'utilizzo di questo prodotto deve essere conforme alle leggi e alle normative nazionali.

AVISO: A destruição final deste produto deve ser feita de acordo com as leis e regulamentos nacionais.

ADVERTENCIA: Este producto debe utilizarse de acuerdo a las normas y leyes nacionales.

VARNING: Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör hanteras enligt nationella lagar och riktlinjer.


In this chapter: ADR10000 Platform Overview ....................................................................... 2-1ADR10000 I/O Protection Options ................................................................. 2-2

ADR10000 Platform Overview SAGEMCOM's ADR10000 is a powerful flexible MSPP optimized for metro networks. It supports multitude technologies in a cost-effective fashion to address the market increasing traffic demands.

The ADR10000 supports scalable STM-1/4/16/64/OTN aggregates and flexible access topologies. It offers a wide range of features and benefits including:

Carrier class Ethernet as well as traditional SDH voice-centric services.

Gradual in-service capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs. An optical connection operating at a specific STM rate can be upgraded from STM-1 to STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 without affecting traffic.

Sublambda grooming resulting in high utilization of existing fibers and top efficiency in transmission of different types of services.

Support of CWDM, transponder, combiner, and other optical cards and modules used to process, amplify, and monitor multichannel signals.

The ADR10000 shelf was designed to facilitate simple installation and maintenance. Hot insertion of cards and modules is allowed, supporting quick maintenance and repair without affecting traffic.

2 Introduction


Figure 2-1: ADR10000 shelf

ADR10000 I/O Protection Options

The ADR10000 shelf boasts an extremely high modular design with two module cages, one in the upper part, one in the lower part, and a card cage in the middle. An expansion TPU shelf that adds protection capabilities to the I/O modules can be mounted on top and under the shelf. An expansion OCU shelf that adds CWDM networking capabilities to the ADR10000 can be mounted on top of the upper TPU or directly on top of the ADR10000 shelf.

Protection of I/O modules in the upper and lower module cages is supported.

CAUTION: When the ADR10000 shelf is to be installed vertically, pay attention to position the shelf with the FCU300 facing downwards, to ensure proper air flow to the ADR10000.


Basic ADR10000 Shelf

The basic ADR10000 shelf is housed in a 246 mm (9.68 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.44 in.) wide, and 350 mm (13.78 in.) high equipment cage. The shelf consists of two module cages, one in the upper part, the second in the lower part, and a card cage in the middle. Each module cage can house up to 8 I/O modules, totaling 16 modules in the entire shelf. The card cage accommodates two MXC300 cards (main and protection), an External Connection Unit (ECU300/ECU300-F), and two wide I/O cards. When I/O cards are not used in the wide slots, they can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 module each, using a mechanical adapter.

I/O protection is not supported in this option.

The ADR10000 shelf can be installed in a horizontal or vertical position.

Figure 2-2: Basic ADR10000 shelf, horizontal installation


Figure 2-3: Basic ADR10000 shelf, vertical Installation

Expanded ADR10000 with I/O Protection

The following I/O protection options are supported for ADR10000 shelves installed in a horizontal position:

A TPU mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the upper module cage.

A TPU attached under the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the lower module cage.

Two TPUs, one mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the upper cage, and one attached under the shelf protecting the I/O modules in the lower cage.

Each TPU adds only 75 mm (3 in.) to the height of the ADR10000 shelf.

Each TPM is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules in the shelf in a 1:1, 1:2, or 1:3 configuration. If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the active MXC via the TC module in the TPU switches the traffic from the active I/O module to the protection module.


The following figures show several options for installing TPUs with the ADR10000 shelf.

Figure 2-4: ADR10000 with one TPU on top of the shelf

Figure 2-5: ADR10000 with two TPUs

Similar I/O protection options are supported for ADR10000 shelves installed in a vertical position.


ADR10000 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities

An OCU can be mounted on top of the basic shelf or on top of a TPU installed on the basic shelf to add CWDM networking capabilities to the platform. Each expansion shelf (TPU or OCU) adds 75 mm (3 in.) to the height of the ADR10000.

NOTE: The OCU is not supported for installation under the ADR10000 shelf.

A typical ADR10000 shelf with an OCU (and two TPUs) is shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-6: ADR10000 with an OCU and two TPUs


In this chapter: Overview ......................................................................................................... 3-1Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 3-5Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection................................................. 3-6ADR Rack Installation Options....................................................................... 3-7Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 3-8ADR10000 Accessories................................................................................. 3-19Equipment Installation................................................................................... 3-34Rack Installation............................................................................................ 3-43Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ............................................................... 3-49

Overview The following sections describe the conditions required for installing the equipment at the site, including site preparation, power sources, rack installation, preparing cables and fibers, installing ancillary units and more.

Site Preparation

Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking the following issues into consideration:

System environmental requirements

Physical location of the ADR10000 platforms

Location of power sources

3 Site Preparation and Rack

Installation


Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm monitoring, etc.)

Work and equipment safety requirements

Site Environmental Requirements

The following environmental conditions must be provided at the installation site. Parameter Compliance requirements

Electromagnetic interference FTZ 1TR9, EN 55022-2/2003, EN 50082-1/97 Temperature ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1

Main Equipment Dimensions

Table 3-1: Equipment dimensions

Equipment type Height (mm)

Width (mm)

Depth (mm)

Max. weight (kg)

ADR10000 350 443 246 8.2 (shelf only) 30 (fully populated)

TPU 75 443 246 5.5 (shelf only) 10 (fully populated)

ADR10000 + TPU 425 443 246 13.7 (shelves only) 40 (fully populated)

ADR10000 + two TPUs

500 443 246 21.9 (shelves only) 50 (fully populated)

ADR10000 + two TPUs + OCU

575 443 246 30.1 (shelves only) 60 (fully populated)

xRAP-100 133 445 185 10 RAP-BG 88 440 150 4 RAP-4B 88 447 155 2.4 xRAP-D 133 445 185 9.5 xDDF-21 44.5 440 150 3 FST 44.5 440 240 5 ODF 44.5 440 240 8


Figure 3-1: ADR10000 horizontal installation space dimension

ADR-10000


Physical Location

WARNING: ADR10000 shelves are intended for installation in restricted access areas only.

Choose the physical location of the ADR10000 shelves, taking the following aspects into consideration:

1. Equipment dimensions, as specified in the following table.

2. Required floor loading capability: 150 kg per rack for a typical 4-shelf installation.

3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring, and management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to cables and fibers, it is recommended to use overhead cable ladders whenever possible, to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.

When a network management station, for example EMS-ADR, is installed on the site, consider the method of connection to the local network management station and the maximum allowed distance.

Power Sources

ADR equipment must be powered only by DC sources in compliance with the applicable sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and FTZ 19PFL1, and the SELV of EN 60950-1 requirements. The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive lead grounded); the allowed supply voltage range is -40 VDC to -57.6 VDC. For redundancy, two separate DC power sources should be available.

The power consumption of the ADR10000 is:

Typical: 800 W

Maximum: 1100 W

NOTE: If the input power connected to one of the xINFs exceeds -57.6 VDC, both xINFs are shut down and the shelf is switched off.


Tools and Test Equipment No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technician toolbox are required for the installation of ADR10000 shelves.

Since traffic cables can be prepared on site, suitable tool kits should also be available. This includes tools for the assembly of coaxial cables (see the following table) and tools for the preparation of optical patch cords.

Table 3-2: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools

No. Name Description

1 Stripper DIN 1.0/2.3 2 Center contact crimp tool (blue) DIN 1.0/2.3 3 Crimp tool, outer DIN 1.0/2.3 4 Cable stripper NCX1 5 Nipper (cutter for center contact) NCX1 6 Die for NCX1 NCX1

Cleaning Optical Connectors

When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors using the standard cleaning kits recommended by the optical connector manufacturers.


Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection

Before you start:

Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes. Immediately report evidence of damage to the carrier, the project manager, and your local SAGEMCOM representative.

CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

Proper handling and grounding precautions required

ADR10000 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection against Electrostatic Discharge (page 1-22). Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install them.

The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection to internal connectors.

You must unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.

To unpack the equipment:

1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.

2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each item for damage. Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, platform, and auxiliary equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads, and cables.

NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors until optical cables are connected to them.

3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be present.

4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until they can be inserted in the platform.


5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing, notify the project manager and your local SAGEMCOM representative.

ADR Rack Installation Options ADR platforms can be installed in the following rack types:

SAGEMCOM's recommended enhanced ETSI optical racks (hereafter referred to as the optical rack), or the improved ETSI racks (hereafter referred to as ETSI A). These racks have been specially adapted by SAGEMCOM and are tailored to meet platform requirements and simplify platform installation and maintenance, including the following benefits:

Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient maintenance of all rack cables, including:

Control cables

Power cables

Data cables (where relevant)

Two channels on the rack’s front rails for routing up to 400 (ETSI A) or 800 (optical rack) optical fibers.

Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders.

Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see Environmental Requirements).

Front door for left or right opening mounting.

Standard ETSI racks (hereafter referred to as ETSI B).

ISO 19 racks and standard US racks. These racks should be used only in consultation with and when approved by SAGEMCOM's Mechanical Department.

ADR racks options are summarized in the following table.

Table 3-3: Equipment rack data

Type Height Width Depth Available space

Optical Rack 2200 mm 600 mm 300 mm 47U (2100 mm)

ETSI A 2200 mm 600 mm 300 mm 46U (2050 mm)

ETSI A 2600 mm 600 mm 300 mm 55U (2450 mm)

ETSI B 2200 mm 600 mm 300 mm 46U (2050 mm)

ETSI B 2600 mm 600 mm 300 mm 55U (2450 mm)

US 7 ft 23 in. 12 in. 44U


Type Height Width Depth Available space (2134 mm) (585 mm) (305 mm) (6.5 ft/1960 mm)

US 7 ft (2134 mm)

19 in. (483 mm)

12 in. (305 mm)

44U (6.5 ft/1960 mm)

ISO 19 7.25 ft (2200 mm)

24 in. (600 mm)

24 in. (600 mm)

47U (6.85 ft/2089 mm)

The loading of a fully equipped rack is 7.35 kn/m2, or 55.35 kn/ft.2.

NOTES:

Not all ADR platforms can be installed in all types of racks. This section includes a general list of the rack options available. The installation instructions for each platform include a list of the racks appropriate for that platform.

The installation instructions in this manual are written on the basis of an installation using an SAGEMCOM enhanced rack. Some of these instructions may not be relevant if you are using a standard rack supplied by other vendors.

Before any installation plan can be completed, a site survey by SAGEMCOM technical support team is required, to verify rack accessibility and accessory compatibility at that site. If you are working with standard racks from other vendors, the site survey is also essential to determine what changes are required to adapt the rack to ADR platform installation requirements.

All SAGEMCOM ADR equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. Some of these installation options are described in Installing Equipment Racks. If your facility uses a different installation paradigm, contact the SAGEMCOM Technical Support team for additional information.

Preparing Cables and Fibers

NOTE: This section provides information for preparing cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can also be ordered from SAGEMCOM. For details, contact SAGEMCOM’s Customer Support team or your SAGEMCOM sales representative.

The main cables required for installing the ADR10000 include:

Grounding cables, described in Grounding Cables (page 3-9)


DC power cables, described in DC Power Cables (page 3-11)

Alarm cables, described in Alarm Cables (page 3-12)

Management cables, described in Management Cables (page 3-13)

Timing (clock) cables, described in Timing (Clock) Cables (page 3-14)

Electric traffic cables, described in Electric Traffic Cables (page 3-14)

Optical fibers, described in Optical Fibers (page 3-15)

Data cables for data modules, described in Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs (page 3-17) as applicable

DC power and traffic cables should be prepared on site. AC power cables suitable for connection to the power outlet types specified when placing the order (according to the site specifications) and the control and alarm cables used within ADR equipment racks, are included in the shipment with power outlets provided according to the site specifications.

The following sections provide information to enable you to prepare cables on site. Refer to Connector Pin Assignments (page A-1) for a description of the equipment connector types and cable wiring.

WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the specified types. Components must also comply with any applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.

Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable workmanship practice.

Grounding Cables Rack equipment is bonded through the screws that fasten the equipment chassis to the frame of the rack. It is therefore necessary to provide a reliable low-impedance connection between the rack frame and the site grounding bus using copper conductors.

Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding bar by means of a copper lead with green/yellow insulation having the same diameter as the RAP input power cable or thicker, in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations.

The end of the lead connected to a RAP, as used in the rack, must be terminated in an M8 lug.


Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole compression lug. If the lug is not plated, bring it to a bright finish and coat it with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack.

WARNING:

The ground cable must be at least the same thickness as the RAP power cable.

To prevent possible damage to ADR equipment, all racks and equipment must be completely grounded before connecting any external devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V) to the platform. All grounding procedures described in Grounding the ADR10000 Platform must be completed before, for example, connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE management system.

WARNING: This equipment is designed to permit the connection of the grounded conductor of the DC supply circuit to the grounding conductor at the equipment. See installation instructions for more details.

When this connection is made, all of the following conditions must be met:

The equipment is connected directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from the grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system earthing electrode is connected.

The equipment is located in the same immediate area (such as adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment with a connection between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere.

The DC supply source is located within the same premises as this equipment.

Devices in the grounded circuit conductor are not switched or disconnected between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.

WARNING: Cet appareil est conçu pour permettre le raccordement du conducteur relié à la terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. au conducteur de terre de l’appareil.

Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent être respectées:


Ce matériel doit être raccordé directement au conducteur de la prise de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. ou à une tresse de mise à la masse reliée à une barre omnibus de terre laquelle est raccordée à l’électrode de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c.

Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont raccordés au conducteur de terre du même circuit d’alimentation c.c. doivent être installés à proximité les uns des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires adjacentes) et à proximité de la prise de terre du circuit d’alimentation c.c. Le circuit d’alimentation c.c. ne doit comporter aucune autre prise de terre.

La source d’alimentation du circuit c.c. doit être située dans la même pièce que le matériel.

Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur de la source d’alimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement à la prise de terre.

DC Power Cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.

DC power cables should be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables are needed:

RAP input power cables

Shelf power cables

RAP input power cables

The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the rack's RAP panel.


Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative conductor, or as required in your area of residence.

The RAP cable ends must be terminated in cable lugs matching the conductor gauge with M8 lugs for all RAP types (xRAP-D, RAP-BG, xRAP-100, or RAP-4B).

The recommended cable gauge is 0 AWG (50 mm2/.078 inch2) or thicker for the xRAP-D, and 2 AWG (35 mm2/.054 in.2) or thicker for the xRAP-100, RAP-BG, or RAP-4B. This gauge ensures that the voltage drop across the rack power cable at full power consumption does not exceed 2 V, even for cable runs up to 30 meters (99 feet) connected to a RAP providing power to two ADR shelves.

When an xRAP is used to provide power to a single ADR shelf, lower lead gauges may be used:

For cable runs not exceeding 20 meters (66 feet), it is sufficient to use 16 mm2 (.025 inch2) copper leads.

For cable runs not exceeding 30 meters (99 feet), it is sufficient to use 25 mm2 (.039 inch2) copper leads.

NOTE:

If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also be reduced to the gauge of the power leads, that is, 16 mm2 (.025 in.2) for lengths up to 20 meters (66 feet), and 25 mm2 (.039 in.2) for lengths up to 30 meters (99 feet).

The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as the xRAP power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power cable is thick, the grounding cable must match that thickness.

The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the thickness of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.

Shelf power cables

Two 12 AWG (25 mm²) cables supplied by SAGEMCOM are used to connect the two redundant input power sources from the RAP panel to the POWER connectors on the MXC300-A and MXC300-B cards of each ADR10000 shelf installed in the rack.

Alarm Cables

Alarm cables used are included in the shipment according to the site specifications. Alarm indications are carried by the following cables:


Shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf alarm indication cable is required for each ADR10000 shelf installed in the rack. One end of the cable is always connected to the ALARMS connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F card. Connection of the other end depends on the cable type, as follows:

xRAP-100 alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the xRAP-100.

xRAP-B alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the xRAP-B.

xRAP-D alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the xRAP-D.

Client alarm cable. Connects to the client's alarm collecting facility. Bay alarm cable. One bay alarm cable is required for each rack. This cable

carries the alarm indications and monitoring lines of the bay (rack). One end of the cable is connected to the RAP, the other end is open and connects to the client's alarm collecting facility. Two types of this cable are available:

xRAP-100 bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARM IN/OUT connector on the xRAP-100.

xRAP-B bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the xRAP-B.

xRAP-D bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the xRAP-D.

Management Cables

Out-of-band management communication is connected to an ADR10000 by means of a minihub with a pair of the RJ-45 Ethernet connectors located on the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F cards.

If one ADR10000 is installed, the connection is made to the management MAIN RJ-45 connector. If more than one ADR10000 is installed in the same site, it is possible to save the use of an external hub. In this case, the first system is connected as explained above, and the other systems are connected in an Ethernet daisy chain. The management MAIN connector of each system is connected to the management PROT/LCT connector of the previous system.

Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources. Cables of Category 3 or better must be used. The length of the cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub port in use (up to a few dozen meters).


Timing (Clock) Cables

The ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F on the ADR10000 shelf has two timing reference connectors, T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2, which are used for 2.048 Mbps signals and have balanced (120 Ω) G.703 interfaces.

The cables used to connect to these connectors are prepared on site, and they comprise individually shielded twisted pairs (the same type of pairs needed for connection to the balanced E1 tributary interfaces).

If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 Ω) G.703 interfaces, a 120 Ω/75 Ω adapter can be supplied for mounting on the T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors. This permits using coaxial cables (BT3002 or equivalent) of the same type used for connecting to balanced E1 tributary interfaces.

Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each ADR10000 traffic interface type.

NOTE: The connectors are identical regardless of whether the traffic cables are connected directly to the I/O modules or to TPMs on the TPU.

Traffic cables mating connector data I/O module Interface type Cable type Mating

connector Qty/ Module

PIM2_21 E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)

Twin multipair cable (2 x 25 shielded 120 Ω twisted pairs)

Twin 50-pin SCSI male

1

PIM2_42 E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)


100-pin SCSI male

2

PIM2_63/B PIM2_63

E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)


Twin 50-pin SCSI male

3

PIM2_63S E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)

3 x twin multipair cable (2 x 25 shielded 120 Ω twisted pairs)

2 x 136-pin VHDCI male

1

PIM345_3 E3 and DS-3 (34/45 Mbps)

NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 male

6


I/O module Interface type Cable type Mating connector

Qty/ Module

SIM1_4/E STM-1 electrical

NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 male

8

SIM1_81 STM-1 electrical

NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 low profile male

16

When a TPU is used, additional patch traffic cables between PIMs and TPMs are required, as described in the following table.

Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU TPM Interface type Cable type Mating connector Qty/

Module

TPM2_1 E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)

Twin multipair cable (25 pairs of shielded 120 Ω twisted pairs)

PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI female TPM: 100-pin SCSI female

1

TPM2_3 E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)


PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI female TPM: 100-pin SCSI female

4

TPM2_42_2 E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)


PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI male TPM: Twin 136-pin VHDCI male

2


Triple multipair cable (25 pairs of shielded 120 Ω twisted pairs)

PIM2_63: Triple twins of 50-pin SCSI male TPM: Twin 136-pin VHDCI male

1 TPM2_63_2



PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI male TPM: Twin 136-pin VHDCI male

1

TPMH_1 E3 and DS-3 (34/45 Mbps) STM-1 electrical

RG179x8 multicoaxial cable

PIM: DIN1.0/2.3 male TPM: 8W8 D-type

2

Optical Fibers

Optical fibers can be prepared on site. 1 SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 electrical module with ETR-1 electrical SFP transceivers.


Use only 2 mm optical fibers to connect to optical interfaces. For each optical interface, SAGEMCOM supplies patch cords with mating optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed on site.

The optical fibers should enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable guides running along the rack side rails, and end at the FST. The tray must contain enough fiber length for extracting modules from the ADR10000 and for replacing fiber in case of damage (splicing repairs). When routing fibers, make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35 mm).

The following table lists the type of fibers and mating connectors needed to prepare fibers for each ADR10000 module/card.

Table 3-4: Optical fibers and mating connector data

I/O module/card

Interface type Fiber type Mating connector

Qty/ Module/Card

SIM1_4/OB SIM1_4/O

STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber patch cords per interface

LC male 8 fibers

SIM1_82 STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber patch cords per interface

LC male 16 fibers


LC male 4 fibers


LC male 8 fibers

SIM16_1 STM-16 1 pair of fiber patch cords per interface

LC male 2 fibers


LC male 4 fibers


LC male 8 fibers

SIM64_XFP STM-64 1 pair of fiber patch cords per interface

LC male 2 fibers


LC male 4 fibers

2 SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 optical module with OTR-1 optical SFP transceivers.


Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs

Data modules like EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs are connected by electrical cables or optical fibers according to the interface type being connected.

Ethernet electrical interfaces are connected by CAT5E SFTP 4-pair cables terminated with RJ-45 connectors.

Table 3-5: EISM optical fibers and mating connector data

EISMB module

Port no. Interface type

Fiber type Mating connector

Qty/ module

EISMB_840 1-2 GbE/FE 1 pair of 50/62.5 µm MM fiber, or 1 pair of 9 µm SM fiber patch cords per interface for GbE

LC male 8 fibers

1 pair of 50/62.5 µm MM fiber patch cords per interface for FE

3-4 FE 1 pair of 50/62.5 µm MM fiber patch cords per interface

LC male

EISMB_840 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the following table.

The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the mating connectors needed for the EISMB_804 module.

Table 3-6: EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data

EISMB module

Port no. Interface type Cable type Mating connector

Qty/ module

EISMB_804 1-2 10/100/1000BaseT CAT5E SFTP 4-pair

RJ-45 2

3-4 10/100BaseT CAT5E SFTP 4-pair

RJ-45 2


Table 3-7: DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data

DIOM module

Port no. Interface type Fiber type Mating connector

Qty/ module

DIOM_40 1-4 GbE/FE 1 pair of 50/62.5 µm MM fiber, or 1 pair of 9 µm SM fiber patch cords per interface for GbE

LC male 8 fibers


DIOM_40 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the following table.

The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the mating connectors needed for the DIOM electrical modules.

Table 3-8: DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data

DIOM module

Port no.

Interface type Cable type Mating connector

Qty/ module

DIOM_08 1-8 10/100BaseT CAT5E SFTP 4-pair

RJ-45 8

Table 3-9: MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data

MCSM module

Port no.

Interface type Fiber type Mating connector

Qty/ module

MCSM 1-8 GbE/FE 1 pair of 50/62.5 µm MM fiber, or 1 pair of 9 µm SM fiber patch cords per interface for GbE

LC male 16 fibers



The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the mating connectors needed for the MCSM module.

Table 3-10: MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data

MCSM module

Port no. Interface type Cable type Mating connector

Qty/ module

MCSM 9-16 10/100BaseT CAT5E SFTP 4-pair

RJ-45 8

ADR10000 Accessories SAGEMCOM offers accessories for efficient and optimal installation of equipment in racks. This section describes the main types of accessories. For custom modifications to standard items, contact SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division support team or your SAGEMCOM sales representative.

xRAP-D

The xRAP-D is a power distribution and alarm panel for ADR platforms installed in racks. The xRAP-D performs the following main functions:

Redundant power distribution for one or two ADR platforms. The xRAP-D can support either one or two ADR platforms. Each platform can work with either one or two power inputs, where one is the main power input (A) and the second is an optional protective backup power input (B). The xRAP-D can work with up to two redundant input power sources, depending on the user's electric infrastructure.

In the default configuration, the xRAP-D supplies independent streams of power to two separate ADR platforms. Input power for one ADR platform is kept completely separate from the input power for the second ADR platform. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the xRAP-D unit. (There are a total of four circuit breakers on the xRAP-D, supporting redundant power supplies for up to two ADR platforms.) The power supply flow for two platforms is illustrated in the following figure.


Figure 3-2: xRAP-D power supply flow

The xRAP-D has four 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to any platform in the ADR family of products. The maximum power supplied to each ADR platform is up to 2250 W, in accordance with the platform type and version.

Note that with the default configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply sources to the xRAP-D do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do not have to be more than 55A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2250 W. Previous xRAP units used a single heavy duty power cable to supply power for up to two ADR platforms. The xRAP-D enables independent power delivery to two shelves through separate cables, enabling use of thinner cables and smaller circuit breakers. The xRAP-D was developed in response to the needs of customers who are not able to support large aggregate power feeding requirements when supporting two ADR platforms.


NOTE: Users who prefer to work with a single power cable from their main power supply (and optionally, a single power cable from the protective power supply) can still work with a single cable if they either:

Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support a single ADR platform only, with a maximum of 2250 W for that platform.

Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support two ADR platforms, where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform. This configuration option requires the use of an optional metal bridge component designed by SAGEMCOM for this purpose. (Note that this configuration option is only available from V7.2, when the management software enforces limitations on maximum power consumption.)

Work with a single 50 mm2 power cable to support two ADR platforms, with a maximum of 2250 W for each platform. This configuration option requires the use of an optional metal bridge component designed by SAGEMCOM for this purpose.

For more information about the bridge-component configuration options, see Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.

The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, ranging to -72 VDC. The internal circuits of the xRAP-D are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the xRAP-D is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.

Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker that also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the ADR10000 shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-D installation. To prevent accidental changing of a circuit breaker’s state, the circuit breakers can be reached easily after opening the front cover of the xRAP-D. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.

Bay alarm indications. The xRAP-D includes four alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications light simultaneously.

A buzzer is activated whenever a Critical alarm is present in ADR platforms connected to the xRAP-D.


Connecting external alarms from two ADR platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts) to the customer's central alarm monitoring system. Customers who wish to define external alarms should refer to the explanation of electrical capacity requirements for external alarms in the ADR System Specification.

Note that the xRAP-D supports up to eight external alarms. These alarms are by default allocated four to each platform.

Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four for each ADR platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm monitoring system.

Exporting Critical buzzer signals. The Critical alarm signal is provided via dry contacts to the customer's central alarm monitoring system for activation of a Critical buzzer. A separate line is provided as well for muting this buzzer, by connecting the line to a ground with a momentary switch.

NOTE: Note that the xRAP-D supports the same alarm and power functions as the xRAP-B and xRAP-HP. When replacing an existing xRAP-HP with an xRAP-D you must also use the appropriate xRAP-D accessory kit, including cables.

The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-D, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.

Figure 3-3: xRAP-D front panel


Table 3-11: xRAP-D front panel component functions

No. Designation Function

1 SOURCE A Translucent cover for the two circuit breakers (designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 – one per ADR platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.

2 TEST Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for test purposes.

3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is connected to the xRAP-D.

4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Critical.

5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Major.

6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Minor.

7 WARNING White indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Warning.

8 Buzzer (concealed under cover)

Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is present in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D.

9 SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.


The xRAP-D connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figures.

Figure 3-4: xRAP-D connectors

Table 3-12: xRAP-D connector functions


1, 2 Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 DC input power

Two 5-pin D-type connectors, designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2, used to connect DC power to the ADR platforms.

3 ALARMS 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the customer alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the received from the ADR platforms by the SHELF 1 and SHELF 2 connectors, including external alarm inputs, external alarm outputs, and ADR severity alarms.

4, 5 SHELF 1 and SHELF 2

Two 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1 and SHELF 2, used to connect alarm cables to the ADR platforms installed in the rack. These cables transmit alarms from the ADR platform to the xRAP unit.

Alarm signals arrive at a SHELF connector on the xRAP unit from two different connector sources on the ADR platform using a Y-Cable.

A 9-pin connector on the ADR platform labeled xRAP is used for the four ADR severity alarms. (CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR, and WARNING)

A 50-pin connector on the ADR platform labeled ALARMS is used for any external alarms defined by client request.


xRAP-100

The xRAP-100 is a power distribution and alarm panel for ADR and BG shelves installed in racks. The xRAP-100 performs the following main functions:

Power distribution for up to four ADR or BG shelves: The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC or -60 VDC. Since ADR and BG shelves can use redundant power sources, the xRAP-100 supports connection to two separate DC power circuits. The internal circuits of the xRAP-100 are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the xRAP-100 is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.

Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the ADR or BG shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.

The xRAP-100 is designed to support three ADR or BG regular shelves and one high-power ADR shelf, or four regular ADR or BG shelves. It has three 3-pin D-type connectors and one 5-pin D-type high-power connector for feeding the shelves. Each 3-pin connector can supply power to one of the following regular shelves:

ADR30G

Any BG shelf

The 5-pin high-power connector can supply power to one of the above regular shelves, or to one of the following high-power shelves:

ADR10000

ADR120G

NOTE: When a regular ADR or BG shelf has to be connected to the 5-pin connector, use a 5-pin D-type male to 3-pin D-type female adapter cable.

The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-100 installation. To prevent accidental changing of a circuit breaker’s state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after opening the front cover of the xRAP-100. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through the cover.

Bay alarm indications: The xRAP-100 includes four alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light simultaneously.


NOTE: BG shelves support only two alarm indications: Major and Minor.

A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in ADR shelves connected to the xRAP-100. In case of BG shelves connected to the xRAP-100, the buzzer is activated whenever a Major alarm is present in the BG shelves.

Connection of alarms from up to four ADR or BG shelves, each shelf with maximum four alarm inputs and two alarm outputs.

The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-100, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.

Figure 3-5: xRAP-100 front panel

Table 3-13: xRAP-100 front panel component functions


1 SOURCE A Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 – one per ADR10000 shelf installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.

-- Buzzer (Concealed under cover)

Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is present in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100.

2 TEST Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for test purposes.

3 POWER ON Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is connected to the xRAP-100.

4 CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Critical.

5 MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Major.



6 MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Minor.

7 WARNING White indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Warning.


The xRAP-100 connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.

Figure 3-6: xRAP-100 connectors

Table 3-14: xRAP-100 connectors


1, 2, 3, 4 Shelf alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input and output lines to ADR or BG shelves and other equipment installed in the rack

5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input and output lines to the customer alarm monitoring facility

6, 7, 8 Shelves DC input power

Three 3-pin D-type connectors designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 for connecting DC power to ADR or BG shelves

9 Shelf DC input, high power

5-pin D-type connector designated Shelf 4 for connecting a high-power ADR, or a regular ADR or BG shelf


RAP-BG

The RAP-BG is a DC power distribution panel for BG shelves installed in racks. It distributes power for up to four ADR10000 shelves installed on the same rack. The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, -60 VDC, or 24 VDC. Since 9200 series shelves can use redundant power sources, the RAP-BG supports connection to two separate DC power circuits.

Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the ADR10000 shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements. The maximum current that can be supplied to a shelf fed from the RAP-BG is 16A.

The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-BG installation. To prevent accidental changing of a circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after opening the front cover of the RAP-BG. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.

The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-BG, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components as indicated by the figure callouts.

Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front panel

Table 3-15: RAP-BG front panel component functions


1 SOURCE A Translucent cover for the four circuit breakers (Shelf 1, Shelf 2, Shelf 3, Shelf 4 - one per BG/ADR shelf installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.



RAP-4B

The RAP-4B is a power distribution and alarm panel for SAGEMCOM platforms installed in racks.

NOTE: The RAP-4B supports operation with BG, ADR (small).

The RAP-4B performs the following main functions:

Power distribution for up to four protected platforms installed on the same rack. The nominal DC power voltage is 48 VDC or 60 VDC. Since the supported platforms can use redundant power sources, the RAP-4B supports connection to two separate DC power circuits.

Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements. The CB rating installed in the RAP-4B for feeding a single platform is max. 35 A. The total power that can be provided by the RAP-4B is max. 4 x 1.1 kW (4.4 kW).

NOTE: The maximum power that can be supplied by the RAP-4B to a single platform is not more than 1.1 kW.

The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-4B installation. To prevent accidentally changing a circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after removing the RAP-4B front cover. The circuit breaker state (ON/OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.

Bay alarm indications: The RAP-4B includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light simultaneously.

NOTE: BG platforms support only two alarm indications, Major and Minor.

A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in an ADR platform connected to the RAP-4B or a Major alarm in a BG or 9600 series platform connected to the RAP-4B.

Connection of alarms from up to four platforms, each platform with max. four alarm inputs and two alarm outputs.


The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-4B, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.

Figure 3-8: RAP-4B front panel

Table 3-16: RAP-4B front panel component functions


1 SOURCE A Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 – one per platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.

--- Buzzer (concealed under cover)

Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is present in the platform connected to the RAP-4B.

2 TEST Pushbutton; pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for test purposes.

3 POWER Green indicator; lights when at least one DC power source is connected to the RAP-4B.

4 CRITICAL Red indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the platform connected to the RAP-4B is Critical.

5 MAJOR Orange indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the platform connected to the RAP-4B is Major.

6 MINOR Yellow indicator; lights when the severity of at least one of the alarms in the platform connected to the RAP-4B is Minor.



The RAP-4B alarm connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.

Figure 3-9: RAP-4B alarm connectors

Table 3-17: RAP-4B connector functions


1, 2, 3, 4 Shelf alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input/output lines from the platforms to the RAP-4B.

5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input lines from the customer's equipment to the platforms, and alarm output lines from the platforms to the customer alarm monitoring facility.


Rack Alarm Panel Power and Alarm Connection Options

The xRAP product family supports power supply and alarms connection to the various types of ADR platforms. A mixture of big and small ADR platforms is possible in accordance with the platforms power consumption and the xRAP total power. All xRAPs support redundancy through connections to two separate power sources for each protected platform (i.e., two independent circuit breakers are provided on the xRAP for each connected platform).

NOTE: The generic name xRAP is used when the text is applicable for any one of the SAGEMCOM xRAP units ( xRAP-D, xRAP-B, xRAP-HP, xRAP-100, or miniRAP).

The following table lists the characteristics of the available xRAPs:

Table 3-18: RAP features

Features miniRAP xRAP-100 xRAP-D xRAP-B (EOL) xRAP-HP (EOL)

Number of ADR platforms with redundant power support3

(2 circuit breakers per platform4)

1 1 + 35 2 2 2

Total power consumption

1.2 KW 3.2 KW 4.5 KW 4.5 KW 4 KW

Severity alarms6 Four alarms for one platform

Integrated, four alarms from four platforms (OR gate)

Two separated groups of four alarms each from two platforms

Two separated groups of four alarms each from two platforms

Integrated, four alarms from two platforms (OR gate)

Separate buzzer signals

--- --- Two separate buzzer signals that report on "Critical" alarms toward the user central monitor system

Two separate buzzer signals that report on "Critical" alarms toward the user central monitor system

---

3 The number of supported shelves depends on their total power consumption. 4 The same type of circuit breaker is used in all xRAP versions. The value of the circuit breaker is defined by the power consumption requirements of the shelf and not by the type of xRAP. 5 The 3-pin connectors for three shelves (shelf#1, shelf#2, and shelf#3) can only be used for the lower power consumption shelves. The 5-pin connectors for shelf#4 can be used either for the lower power consumption shelves or for the higher power consumption shelves. 6 Critical, Major, Warning, and Minor alarms toward the customer central monitoring system.


Features miniRAP xRAP-100 xRAP-D xRAP-B (EOL) xRAP-HP (EOL)

Separate buzzer shut-off signals

--- --- Two separate buzzer shut off signals that mute the buzzer in the user central monitor system

Two separate buzzer shut off signals that mute the buzzer in the user central monitor system

---

Number of input External alarms7

--- Fixed, four inputs per platform, total 16 per xRAP-100

Fixed, four inputs per platform, total eight inputs per xRAP-D

Fixed, four inputs per platform, total eight inputs per xRAP-B

Flexible8, total eight inputs per xRAP-HP (up to Rev.C01)

For Rev.C02, fixed, four inputs per platform, total eight inputs

Number of output External alarms9

--- Fixed, two outputs per platform, total eight per xRAP-100

Fixed, four outputs per platform, total eight outputs per xRAP-D

Fixed, four outputs per platform, total eight outputs per xRAP-B

Flexible10, total eight outputs per xRAP-HP (up to Rev.C01)

For Rev.C02, fixed, four outputs per platform, total eight outputs

Connector type for power cable between xINF and xRAP (xRAP side)

3 pin connector

3 pin and 5 pin connector

5 pin connector 5 pin connector Terminal lug

Cable size between xRAP and batteries (connects with terminal lugs)

35 mm2

(1+1)

35 mm2

(1+1)

25 mm211

(1+1) & (1+1) Two inputs for side A and two inputs for side B

50 mm2

(1+1)

50 mm2

(1+1)

NOTE: Beginning with V7.2, platform power supply limitations are enforced by the management software. Upper bound limits for total platform power usage are defined through the management configuration variables. The upper bound limits are enforced through software protection. For more information, see the EMS-ADR User Manual.

7 External Alarms input via Opto coupler. 8 Using dip switches. 9 External Alarms output via dry contacts. 10 Using dip switches. 11 Bridge option to work with a single 50mm2 power cable available.


Equipment Installation The following sections provide general instructions for the installation of the ADR10000 and auxiliary equipment.

The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those described for installation of the equipment, and when relevant, notes regarding live replacement or upgrade are inserted in these procedures.

The information appearing in these sections should be used in conjunction with specific site installation plans in the particular customer network. If you are interested in obtaining design or installation assistance from SAGEMCOM Networks Solutions Division’s Customer Support team, or wish to prepare a network installation plan, contact your SAGEMCOM sales representative.

The ADR10000 shelf, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in the Product Line Reference Manual.

Preliminary Preparations

The installation procedures provided in this chapter assume that:

The sites at which the installation procedures are carried out comply with the requirements listed in Site Preparation (page 3-1).

The preliminary preparations specified in Installing ADR10000: Before You Start Safety Guidelines (page 1-1) have been completed.

Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit (to avoid errors, it is recommended to mark the prescribed positions on the rack rails using a soft pencil).


Equipment Installation Sequence

Each component of the ADR10000 system is supplied separately and must be installed in the correct sequence, according to the site plan.

The ADR10000 shelf can be mounted in the rack in an horizontal or vertical position. The main equipment used for both installations is similar, and differs in the number of accessories, type of brackets used in each position, and one accessory, used only for horizontal mountings.

NOTE:

If you are not installing an FST for a particular ADR10000 shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the rack in case optical modules are added to the shelf in the future.

If you are not installing a TPU for a particular ADR10000 shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the rack so that the protection unit can be added in the future, if required, without interrupting operation.

CAUTION:

If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or a buffer plate must be installed between any such additional equipment and the ADR10000 shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. This heat buffer must be purchased from SAGEMCOM.

During the installation of equipment in the rack, make sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector.

Several installation options are illustrated in Installation Options (page 4-1).


ADR10000 Horizontal Shelf and Accessories Installation Sequence

A high-density installation of a horizontal ADR10000 shelf and corresponding accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table that follows.

Figure 3-10: Components of ADR10000 horizontal installation

ADR-10000 with two TPUs

ADR-10000 shelf (4)


Depending on the specific equipment being installed according to the site installation plan, the installation of an ADR10000 system comprises the general stages in the order of execution set out in the following table.

Table 3-19: Outline of ADR10000 horizontal installation sequence

Step Procedure Section

1. Install a rack (if required). Rack Installation (page 3-43) 2. Unpack and perform a visual inspection. Unpacking and Performing Visual

Inspection (page 3-6) 3. Install ancillary equipment in the rack,

including: xRAP-D, xRAP-100, RAP-BG, or

RAP-4B Cable guides (two) Cable slack tray Fiber guides for ETSI A racks (two) FST (optional) ODF units (optional) Optical Patch Panel (OPP)

Note: Installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic cable routing process.

Installing Ancillary Units in Racks (page 3-49)

4. Install the ADR10000 shelf in the rack. Note: If your site installation plan includes TPU protection, the ADR10000 is supplied with the TPU already installed. If you need to connect a TPU unit to an existing ADR10000 shelf, see Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR10000 Shelf (page 5-28).

Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in Racks (page 4-7)

5. Install the air filter. Installing the Air Filter 6. Install the common cards in the

ADR10000 shelf, including: FCU300 ECU300/ECU300-F MXC300 with NVM flash card

Installing ADR10000 Cards (page 5-1)



7. Install the modules in the ADR10000 shelf, including:

Optical and electrical I/O modules (SIM, PIM)

EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data modules Optical I/O cards (SIM16_4 or

SIM64_XFP) SFP transceivers in optical

ADR10000 modules

Installing ADR10000 Modules

8. Install cards and modules in the optional TPU, including:

TC/TCF module Single-slot TPMs Double-slot TPMs Triple-slot TPMs

Installing TPU Modules (page 5-21)

9. Install blank covers where I/O modules, cards, and TPMs are not used.

—

10. Route and connect all cables and fibers for ETSI A racks, including:

Power and alarm cables Optical fibers to optical modules

transceivers Electrical interface cables to

electrical modules (includes installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel)

Electrical traffic through the TPU Data cables to EISMB/MCSM/DIOM

modules Timing cables Management cables

Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks (page 6-1)

11. In some cases, it may be necessary to connect a TPU unit to an existing ADR10000 shelf.

Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR10000 Shelf (page 5-28)


ADR10000 Vertical Shelf and Accessories Installation Sequence

A high-density installation of a vertical ADR10000 shelf and corresponding accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table that follows.

Figure 3-11: Components of ADR10000 vertical installation

ADR-10000 shelf

ADR-10000 shelf (5) including


Table 3-20: Outline of ADR10000 vertical installation sequence


1. Install a rack (if required). Rack Installation (page 3-43) 2. Unpack and perform a visual inspection. Unpacking and Performing Visual

Inspection (page 3-6) 3. Install ancillary equipment in the rack,

including: xRAP-B, xRAP-100, or xRAP Cable guide Fiber guide for ETSI A racks FST (optional) ODF units (optional) OPP (optional)

Note: Installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic cable routing process.

Installing Ancillary Units in Racks (page 3-49)

4. Prepare the ADR10000 shelf for vertical installation:

Remove the horizontal installation brackets.

Install vertical installation brackets.

5. Install the ADR10000 shelf in the rack. Note: If your site installation plan includes TPU protection, the ADR10000 is supplied with the TPU already installed. If you need to connect a TPU unit to an existing ADR10000 shelf, see Installing a TPU on the ADR10000 Shelf.

Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in Racks (page 4-7)

6. Install the air filter. Installing the Air Filter 7. Install the common cards in the

ADR10000 shelf, including: FCU300 ECU300/ECU300-F MXC300 with NVM flash card

Installing ADR10000 Cards (page 5-1)



8. Install the modules in the ADR10000 shelf, including:

Optical and electrical I/O modules (SIM, PIM)

EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data modules Optical I/O cards (SIM16_4 or

SIM64_XFP) SFP transceivers in optical

ADR10000 modules

Installing ADR10000 Modules (page 5-12)

9. Install cards and modules in the optional TPU, including:

TC/TCF module Single-slot TPMs Double-slot TPMs Triple-slot TPMs

Installing TPU Modules

10. Install blank covers where I/O modules, cards, and TPMs are not used.

—

11. Route and connect all cables and fibers for ETSI A racks, including:

Power and alarm cables Optical fibers to optical modules

transceivers Electrical interface cables to electrical modules (includes installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel)

Electrical traffic through the TPU Data cables to EISMB/MCSM/DIOM

modules Timing cables Management cables

Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks (page 6-1)

12. In some cases, it may be necessary to connect a TPU unit to an existing ADR10000 shelf.

Installing a TPU on the ADR10000 Shelf

Outline of Installation Procedure

The main steps involved in the installation of an ADR10000 shelf are listed below. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.

1. Prepare the installation site (see "Site Preparation" page 3-1) and check physical location, environmental compliance, and availability of power sources.


2. Prepare power, alarm, and management cables at the installation site (see "Platform Installation" page 4-1).

3. Prepare transmission cables at the installation site.

4. Route the required power, alarm, management, and transmission cables to the intended ADR10000 equipment location (see "Platform Installation" page 4-1).

5. If required, install the equipment racks (see "Rack Installation" page 3-43).

6. Mark the location of each ADR10000 shelf and relevant accessories Fiber Storage Tray (FST), patch panels, and Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) on each rack, in accordance with the site installation plan.

NOTE: If you are currently installing an ADR10000 shelf without TPU protection, you may want to leave sufficient space above/under the shelf to enable the addition of the TPU/TPUs at a later stage.

7. When applicable, install the EMS-ADR management station (see the EMS-ADR User Manual).

8. Install the power distribution and alarm panels – xRAP-D (page 3-19), or xRAP-100 (page 3-25), and other equipment needed in each rack.

9. Install the ADR10000 shelves in the appropriate rack.

10. For each ADR10000 shelf where optical modules are used, install an FST above the ADR10000 shelf and route the optical fibers to the FST (see "Installing the FST" page 3-91).

NOTE: Even if you are not currently installing an FST, it is recommended that you leave enough space above the ADR10000 shelf to enable future installation, in case optical modules are added to the shelf at a later stage.

11. Install the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F, FCU300, MXC300, and I/O cards in the shelf (see "Installing ADR10000 Cards" page 5-1).

12. Install the prescribed I/O modules in the shelf.

13. If applicable, install the TC card and the prescribed TPMs in the TPU.

14. Depending on the modules in your ADR10000 shelf:

Route the optical fibers from the FST to the relevant module connectors.


Route the E1 electrical cables to the patch panel location.

Route the data cables to the data modules (EISMB/DIOM/MCSM).

Install a patch panel for each ADR10000 shelf where electrical E1 modules are used and 120 Ω/75 Ω conversion is required. You will need a separate patch panel for each PIM2_21 module in the shelf.

NOTE: The patch panel can be installed on the same rack above the ADR10000 shelf or on a different rack.

Connect coaxial and multipair traffic cables to the electrical I/O modules if you are not using a TPU, or for modules which are not protected.

Connect both the electrical I/O modules and the coaxial and multipair traffic cables to the TPU if you are using a TPU.

Refer to the relevant section for the rack type in use (ETSI A).

15. Connect control cables between ECU300/ECU300-F, and management station.

16. Connect management cables between the equipment installed in the rack and the management station.

17. Connect power and alarm monitoring cables from the RAP panels to each ADR10000 installed in the rack, as described in Connecting Power Cables (page 6-3) and Connecting Alarm Cables (page 6-4).

NOTE: In some cases, you may need to add a TPU after the ADR10000 has already been installed. Instructions for this procedure are provided in Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR10000 shelf (page 5-28).

Rack Installation

Installing Equipment Racks


NOTE: The instructions in this section are relevant to the installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that ADR10000 shelves be installed in ETSI A racks.

Rack Floor Marking

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.

Before you start:

Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.

If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (page 3-6)).

To mark out the rack floor plan:

1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:

ETSI A racks: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (page 3-46).

23 in. rack: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (page 3-47).

19 in. rack: Use template of diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (page 3-47).

The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.

2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also mark out all cable entry slots.

3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for equipment bolting.

Rack Installation on Concrete Floors

This section describes how to install racks on concrete floors.

To mount the rack on a concrete floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate template (diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (page 3-46) diagram a. or b. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (page 3-47)).


2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.

3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.

4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in accordance with diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks, or diagram c. of Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks.


Rack Installation on Wooden Floors

This section describes how to install racks on wooden floors.

To mount the rack on a wooden floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate template (see the following figures), using a 5-mm drill bit.


3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the following figures).

Figure 3-12: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks


Figure 3-13: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks

Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended) Floors

This section describes how to install racks on floating (suspended) floors.

To mount the rack on a floating (suspended) floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor in accordance with the appropriate template.


3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (page 3-46).


Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly

This section describes how to install racks on a suspended overhead tray.

To mount the rack on a suspended overhead tray:

1. Refer to the suspended overhead tray diagram (see the following figure) and position the overhead rack securing brackets.

2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets. 2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks are generally attached only to the ceiling.

Figure 3-14: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead tray (2200 mm rack)

Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the rack using the extendable installation rails available from SAGEMCOM.

In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before installing the equipment.

Rack Grounding

Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar. Use a grounding lead that meets the Rack grounding requirements listed in section Before You Start.


19 in. Rack Installation

The ADR10000 can also be installed in European 19 in. racks. This is accepted under the limitations that the rack's general dimensions are according to the following figure. Any other European 19 in. rack must first be examined and approved by SAGEMCOM’s.

Figure 3-15: Example of an approved European 19" rack

Installing Ancillary Units in Racks

SAGEMCOM offers various accessories for efficient installation of equipment in racks. Contact SAGEMCOM’s Customer Support team or your SAGEMCOM sales representative if you need custom modifications to standard items or additional items.

This section includes instructions for the installation of ancillary units. The specific units you will need to install depend on your site installation plan, and may include one or more of the following:

RAP power distribution frame, usually located at the top of the rack: xRAP-D – Installing the xRAP-D (page 3-50), for connection of up to

two ADR10000 shelves on the same rack xRAP-100 – Installing the xRAP-100 (page 3-65), for connection of up

to one ADR10000 shelf, and three ADR smaller shelves on the same rack

RAP-BG – Installing the RAP-BG (page 3-72), for connection of one ADR10000 shelf on the same rack


RAP-4B – Installing the RAP-4B (page 3-80), for connection of one ADR10000 shelf on the same rack

Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks (page 3-88)

FST located above the ADR10000 shelf accessories, recommended for installations with a large number of optical modules – Installing the FST (page 3-91)

ODF units – Installing the ODF (page 3-93)

OPP – Installing the OPP (page 3-96)

In addition, you may need to install an xDDF-21 patch panel where PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B or PIM2_63S are used, and where conversion between balanced 120 Ω and unbalanced 75 Ω interfaces is required. The xDDF-21 patch panel can be installed in the same rack above the ADR10000 shelf, or in a different rack with a longer SCSI cable running from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B (or VHDCI cable for a PIM2_63S) in the ADR10000 shelf to the patch panel.

Installation of the xDDF-21 patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic cable connection procedure described in Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules (page 6-6).

In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Philips screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.

CAUTION: If additional equipment other than ADR10000 shelves is used in the rack, a heat buffer must be installed between any such additional equipment and the ADR10000 shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf.

Consult your SAGEMCOM representative regarding the exact heat buffer required.

Installing the xRAP-D

NOTE: Skip this section if the xRAP-D is not used.

Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (page 3-11).

The installation of an xRAP-D unit includes the following steps:

1. Prepare DC power cables.


2. Install the xRAP-D in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack or on the extendable installation rails.

3. Ground the xRAP-D to the rack grounding stud.

4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D. Depending on the site power requirements, one of the following cable connections options should be chosen:

a. In most configurations, either one or two standard (25mm2) input power cables are connected to each side of the xRAP-D unit. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (page 3-55).

b. Alternatively, a single power input cable may be connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.

5. Attach protective covers to the sides and bottom of the xRAP-D unit. (From V7.15 only, required for NEBS; optional for all others.)

6. Connect the DC power cables of the ADR10000 shelves to the xRAP-D.

7. Install circuit breakers.

8. Check DC voltage polarity.

9. Connect the alarm cables.

For a description of the xRAP-D, refer to the Product Line Reference Manual.

Preparing DC Input Power Cables

The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the xRAP-D source A and source B inputs. When working with the xRAP-D, four sets of cables are typically required, two for each source.

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.


Before you start:

In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power cables connected, the xRAP-D works with a full set of input power cables and backup power cables. This option, illustrated in the following figure, is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (page 3-55).



Another power configuration option supported by the xRAP-D enables use of a single power input cable to support either one or two ADR platforms. The single power cable is connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. Two variations of this option are illustrated in the following figure. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.

Figure 3-17: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations

NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source. This supplies enough power to support a single ADR platform with 2250 W, or two ADR platforms where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform. In many cases, this configuration is sufficient.

However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all input power cables from all power sources to the xRAP-D unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in place and ready to supply power to a second ADR platform, if the network configuration is ever changed.


Each input power cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 25 (or 50) mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.

If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.

To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.

2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.

3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720 crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die, or equivalent.

4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.

5. Repeat these steps for each DC power cable being used.

To install the xRAP-D:

Attach the xRAP-D to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

To ground the xRAP-D:

1. The xRAP-D grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the following figure of the xRAP-D to identify the grounding stud.

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements described in Grounding Requirements (page 1-7).

3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-D grounding stud using a spring washer and nut.


4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack grounding stud.

Figure 3-18: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud

Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D

In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power cables connected, the xRAP-D works with four sets of input power cables. This typical configuration option is described in this section.



NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source. This supplies enough power to support a single ADR platform with 2250 W, or two ADR platforms where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform. In many cases, this configuration is sufficient. The instructions in this section apply to this configuration option also. (This configuration option is only available from V7.2, when the management software enforces limitations on maximum power consumption.)

However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all input power cables from the power sources to the xRAP-D unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in place and ready to supply power to a second ADR platform, if the network configuration is ever changed.

Alternatively, a single power input cable supporting two ADR platforms may be connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.

To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the xRAP-D by referring to the following figure.

Figure 3-20: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes


2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover and remove the cover.

Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in accordance with the following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the source A side (main); the same board is used at the source B side (protection).

Note that there are two complete sets of power terminals and circuit breakers on each side. Separate input power cables from the user's input power supply feed through the two sets of input power terminals into the two circuit breakers on the source A side, supplying independent power sources for up to two ADR shelves. Each circuit breaker feeds into a separate power output connection for the power cable that connects to the ADR platform.

Similarly, separate input power cables from the user's input power supply feed through separate input terminals into the two circuit breakers on the source B side, and from the circuit breakers feed into the additional power output connections that provide an optional protective backup power supply for up to two ADR shelves.

Figure 3-21: Connecting DC power cables


The preceding figure portrays the electrical connections on the left side of the xRAP-D, the side that connects to the user's main power supply for the ADR shelves being powered. The right side of the xRAP-D contains a mirror image of the connections illustrated in the preceding figure. The right side connects to the user's (optional) backup protective power supply for the shelves.

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-D power terminal board.

3. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate xRAP-D opening.

4. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminals, marked (+) on the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of positive terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables.

5. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.

6. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of negative terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables.

7. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.

8. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for source B.

9. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-D (see To ground the xRAP-D (page 3-54)), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.


Attaching Protective Covers

From V7.15 only, as required for NEBS. Optional for all others.

To attach protective covers on the xRAP-D:

1. From the open back end, look at the inside panel of the xRAP-D unit. Find the four screws in the left and right sides of the power panel. The two screws on the left side are highlighted in the following figure.

Figure 3-22: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit

2. Find the replacement spacer screws included in the protective cover kit. Note that four replacement spacer screws are included with the xRAP-D. A replacement spacer screw is illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 3-23: Replacement spacer screw


3. Replace the side screws with the replacement spacer screws. The following figure illustrates the inside of the xRAP-D unit, highlighting the left side replacement spacer screws in place.

Figure 3-24: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit

4. Find the small L-shaped protective covers included in the kit. Four protective covers are included for the xRAP-D. The protective covers are illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 3-25: Protection cover for xRAP-D


5. Place the protective covers into the xRAP-D, two covers on each side. For each protective cover, the smaller hole fits onto the top of the spacer screw on one side and the two larger holes are anchored on top of the two terminals above the spacer screw. The jutting-out edge of the protective cover fits into the opening on the edge of the xRAP next to the terminals. The following figure illustrates protective covers inserted into the xRAP-D unit.

Figure 3-26: xRAP-D protective covers in place

6. Secure the protective covers in place by screwing on the wing nuts supplied in the kit onto the tops of the spacer screws on each side.

7. Find the protective bottom panel in the kit. The bottom panel for the xRAP-D is illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 3-27: Bottom panel for xRAP-D


8. Secure the bottom panel into place with the four screws supplied in the kit.

To connect the DC power cable for an ADR10000 platform:

1. Before starting, identify the platform power connectors on the xRAP-D board in accordance with the following figure.

Figure 3-28: xRAP-D connectors

2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 5-pin D-type male connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to connector Shelf 1 (see preceding figure).

3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.

4. If you are connecting an additional platform to the xRAP-D, repeat the above steps for the second platform. Note that a maximum of 55A is supplied from the power sources to each ADR platform. Power is supplied independently to each ADR platform connected to the xRAP unit. Power is not shared between ADR platforms.

5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the shelves to source B.

6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-D and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see To ground the xRAP-D (page 3-54)).

7. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding platform position, and securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function.


NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after completing the installation of the shelves and all other components.

To install the xRAP-D circuit breakers:

1. If the xRAP-D front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).

Figure 3-29: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers

2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform configuration.

3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the xRAP-D source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.

4. If an additional platform is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding platform position of the power terminal board.

5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B circuit breakers.


To check the DC voltage polarity:

1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-D.

2. Set all xRAP-D circuit breakers to ON.

3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive and negative pins of each power cable.

CAUTION: Pay attention not to short-circuit the multimeter leads when checking the voltage.

NOTE: The power cable terminates with a 3-pin (3W3), or a 5-pin (5W5) connector in accordance with the connected ADR shelf. For a 3W3 connector the positive pin is A3 and the negative pin A2; for a 5W5 connector the positive pins are A4, A5, and the negative pins A2, A3.

4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC) and that it has the correct polarity.

5. Return all xRAP-D circuit breakers to OFF.

6. Disconnect the xRAP-D input power sources.

7. Reinstall the xRAP-D front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.

During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the connectors in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (page 3-55).

To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-D:

1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.

2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable to the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties.

3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended for Shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-D.

4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-D (see the figure in To ground the xRAP-D (page 3-54)), and attach them to the bracket with cable ties.


5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding platform position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its function.

6. If an additional platform is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for the cables serving the additional platform. Make sure to attach identification tags to each cable end.

Installing the xRAP-100

Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (page 3-11).

The installation of an xRAP-100 unit includes the following steps:


2. Install the xRAP-100 in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack or on the extendable installation rails.

3. Ground the xRAP-100 to the rack grounding stud.

4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100.

5. Connect the DC power cables of the ADR10000 shelves to the xRAP-100.


7. Check DC voltage polarity.

8. Connect the alarm cables.

For a description of the xRAP-100, refer to the Product Line Reference Manual.

The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the xRAP-100 source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each source.

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.


Before you start:

Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 35 mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.

If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.


1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.

2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.



To install the xRAP-100:

Attach the xRAP-100 to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.


To ground the xRAP-100:

1. The xRAP-100 grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the following figure to identify it.

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements described in Grounding Requirements (page 1-7).

3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-100 grounding stud using a spring washer and nut.


Figure 3-30: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud

To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the xRAP-100 by referring to the following figure.

Figure 3-31: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes


2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover and remove the cover.

3. Identify the various terminals located on the xRAP-100 board in accordance with the following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the source A side; the same terminals are used at the source B side.

Figure 3-32: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-100 board.

4. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate xRAP-100 opening.

5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on the power terminal board.

6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm.

7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board.




10. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (page 3-67)), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.

To connect the DC power cable for an ADR10000 shelf:

1. Before starting, identify the shelf power connectors on the xRAP-100 board in accordance with the following figure.

Figure 3-33: Identification of xRAP-100 connectors

2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin D-type male connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to connector Shelf 1 (see the above figure).

NOTE: The cables leading to connectors Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 can only be connected with a 3-pin D-type connector (for regular shelves : ADR30G). If a regular shelf has to be connected to the 5-pin, D-type connector, use an adapter cable with a 5-pin D-type connector on the xRAP-100 side and a 3-pin D-type connector on the shelf side.

NOTE: If a high power shelf has to be connected to the xRAP-100 it can be connected only to the 5-pin D-type connector (Shelf 4), using a 5-pin D-type to 5-pin D-type adapter cable.


3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.

4. If you are connecting additional shelves to the xRAP-100, repeat the above steps for each shelf.

5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the shelves to source B.

6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100, and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (page 3-67)).

7. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function.

NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after completing the installation of the shelves and all other components.

Installing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers

To install the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:

1. If the xRAP-100 front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).

Figure 3-34: Installation of xRAP-100 circuit breakers


2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration.

The recommended circuit breakers according to the ADR10000 shelf configuration are listed in the following table.

3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the xRAP-100 board corresponding to source A, as shown in the previous figure.

4. If more than one shelf is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding sockets on the board.

5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B circuit breakers.

Table 3-21: ADR10000 recommended circuit breakers

Shelf type Maximum power dissipation

Recommended CB per shelf

ADR10000 basic shelf 950 W/3241 BTU/hr 35A ADR10000 with TPU 1000 W/3412

BTU/hr 35A

ADR10000 with two TPUs 1050 W/3583 BTU/hr

35A

ADR10000 with two TPUs and one OCU

1100 W/3753 BTU/hr

35A

To check the DC voltage polarity:

1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-100.

2. Set all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to ON.

3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive (pin A3) and negative (pin A2) pins of each power cable.

4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC), and that it has the correct polarity.

5. Return all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to OFF.

6. Disconnect the xRAP-100 input power sources.

7. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.


To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-100:

Use Identification of xRAP-100 connectors (page 3-69) to identify the xRAP-100 connector functions.

1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.

2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable to the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties.

3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended for shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-100.

4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (page 3-67)), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.

5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding shelf position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its function.

6. If an additional shelf is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for the cables serving the additional shelf. Make sure to attach identification tags to each cable end.

Installing the RAP-BG

Before You Start:

Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables.

For a description of the RAP-BG, refer to the Product Line Reference Manual.

To install the RAP-BG:


2. Install the RAP-BG in the prescribed location.

3. Ground the RAP-BG to the rack grounding stud.

4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-BG.

5. Connect the DC power cables of the ADR shelves to the RAP-BG.


7. Check power wiring.



NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.

The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the RAP-BG source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.

NOTE: When the RAP-BG provides power to a single ADR shelf, lower gauge cables may be used. Refer to DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.

CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.


1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.

2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.


It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.

4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.


Installing the RAP-BG

The RAP-BG is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack.

To install the RAP-BG:

Attach the RAP-BG to the side rails and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

To ground the RAP-BG:

1. The RAP-BG grounding stud is located on its rear cover. Use the following figure to identify it.

Figure 3-35: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements described in Grounding Requirements.

3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-BG grounding stud, using a spring washer and nut.



To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-BG:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-BG by referring to the following figure.

Figure 3-36: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover and remove the cover.

3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side; a similar board is used at source B side).

Figure 3-37: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG


CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-BG power terminal board.

4. Bring the two leads of DC source A input power cable to the appropriate RAP-BG opening.

5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure).

6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm.

7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure).



10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using cable ties.

During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the RAP-BG DC connections in Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG (page 3-75).

To connect the DC power cables to a shelf:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-BG.

2. Insert the DC power cable end, terminated with lugs, of the ADR10000 shelf through the opening for shelf power cables connecting to source A. If more shelves are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Shelf 1 cable.

3. Attach the red lead lug of the shelf power cable to the positive stud terminal of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.


5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.



7. Identify the shelves grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of the RAP-BG according to the following figure.

Figure 3-38: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws

8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the shelf power cable to the ground stud terminal located on the RAP-BG side panel.

9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.

10. If more ADR10000 shelves are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each shelf power cable.

11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the shelves to source B.

12. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function.


To install the RAP-BG circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-BG front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover to the RAP-BG chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).

Figure 3-39: RAP-BG front cover removal

2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration).

Figure 3-40: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation

3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the RAP-BG source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.

4. If more shelves are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the circuit breakers into the corresponding shelf positions of the power terminal board.

5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source B circuit breakers.


To check DC voltage polarity:

1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see Grounding Requirements).

2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-BG.

3. Set all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to ON.

4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts of each power cable.

The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the ADR10000 shelf, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure 3-41: Platform DC input power connector pin functions


6. Return all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to OFF.

7. Disconnect the RAP-BG input power sources.

8. Reinstall the RAP-BG front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.


Installing the RAP-4B

Before You Start:

Before connecting DC power cables, see DC Power Cables.

For a description of the RAP-4B, see 9200 series Reference Manual.

To install the RAP-4B:


2. Install the RAP-4B in the prescribed location.

3. Ground the RAP-4B to the rack grounding stud.

4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-4B.

5. Connect the DC power cables of the ADR platforms to the RAP-4B.


7. Check power wiring.


NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections use cables of the colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.

The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the RAP-4B source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 50 mm2 (0.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.

NOTE: When the RAP-4B provides power to a single BroadGate platform, lower gauge cables may be used. See DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.

CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are


not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.


1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.

2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.


It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.


Installing the RAP-4B

The RAP-4B is attached to the rack side rails in the top position of the rack.

To install the RAP-4B:

Attach the RAP-4B to the side rails and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

To ground the RAP-4B:

NOTE: The RAP-4B is supplied, by default, with a grounding cable connected to the rear of the unit. Use this cable to connect ground to the RAP-4B.


1. The RAP-4B grounding studs are located on its rear cover. Use the following figure to identify these studs.

Figure 3-42: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud

If a grounding cable is already attached to the RAP-4B, skip Steps 2 and 3.

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead (with a two-hole lug) in accordance with details described in Grounding Requirements (page 1-7).

3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-4B grounding studs, using spring washers and nuts.

The following figure shows the grounding cable attached to the RAP-4B.

Figure 3-43: RAP-4B with a grounding cable

4. Connect the two-hole lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack's grounding bar.


To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B:

1. Before starting, refer to the following figure to identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-4B.

Figure 3-44: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover and remove the cover.

3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board by referring to the following figure (showing source A side; a similar board is used at source B side).

Figure 3-45: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B


CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-4B power terminal board.

4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the appropriate RAP-4B opening.

5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure).


7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure).



10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using cable ties.

During the following procedure, refer to the figure illustrating the RAP-4B DC connections in Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B (page 3-83).

To connect the DC power cable to a platform:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-4B.

2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the ADR10000 platform through the opening for power cables connecting to source A. If more platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Platform 1 cable.

3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.

4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and M6 screw. Tighten the M6 screw with a torque of 320 N cm to 350 N cm.

5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.



7. Identify the platforms grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of the RAP-4B according to the following figure.

Figure 3-46: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws

8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the ground stud terminal located on the RAP-4B side panel.

9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.

10. If more ADR10000 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each platform power cable.

11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the platforms to source B.

12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding platform position, and then securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function.


To install the RAP-4B circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-4B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the front cover to the chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).

Figure 3-47: RAP-4B front cover removal

2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to power circuit A of Platform 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment platform; its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform configuration).

Figure 3-48: RAP-4B circuit breakers installation

3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the RAP-4B source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.

4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the circuit breakers into the corresponding platform positions of the power terminal board.

5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source B circuit breakers.


Checking DC Voltage Polarity

To check DC voltage polarity:

1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see Grounding Requirements (page 1-7)).

2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-4B.

3. Set all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to ON.

4. Use a DMM to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts of each power cable.

The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the ADR10000 platform, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure 3-49: Platform DC input power connector pin functions


6. Return all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to OFF.

7. Disconnect the RAP-4B input power sources.

8. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it with the two captive screws.

Installing the Cable Guide

The number of cable guides required for horizontal ADR10000 shelf installations depends on whether electrical traffic modules are used in the upper module cage. One cable guide should be installed one hole under the ADR10000, to help neatly route control, timing, and management cables connected to the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F card and traffic cables connected to electrical traffic modules in the lower module cage. If electrical traffic modules are installed in the upper module cage, an additional cable guide should be installed one installation hole above the shelf.

One cable guide should be installed above the ADR10000 shelf in vertical installations.


The cable guide is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19” racks and the other for ETSI racks.

To attach the rack mount brackets to the cable guide:

Attach each bracket to the corresponding cable guide sidewall with the four screws supplied in the installation kit.

Figure 3-50: Cable guide

To install the cable guide in the rack:

Install the cable guide in the prescribed location in the rack, and fasten it to the side rails of the rack with four screws.

Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks

The fiber guide for ETSI A racks should be installed one mounting hole above the cable guide in the rack.

To attach the rack mount brackets to the fiber guide:

Attach each bracket to the corresponding fiber guide sidewall with the four screws supplied in the installation kit.

Figure 3-51: Fiber guide

To install the fiber guide in the rack:

Install the cable guide in the rack one mounting hole above the cable guide and fasten it to the rack side rails with four screws.


Installing the Cable Slack Tray

The cable slack tray is installed only in horizontal ADR10000 shelf installations that also have a lower cable guide installed; these usually also include a fiber guide.

Figure 3-52: Cable slack tray

To install the cable slack tray in the rack:

Install the cable slack tray in the rack one mounting hole under the cable guide and fasten it to the rack side rails with two M6 screws, washers, and nuts.


Installing the PIM2_63S Traffic Cable Box Tray

The PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray is available in two options for installation above or below the ADR10000 shelf. In installations in which the PIM2_63S are installed in both the upper and lower I/O module cage the two types must be installed. The tray is supplied by default with reversible brackets for installation in ETSI or 19" racks. If installation in 23" racks is required make sure to order the appropriate bracket kit.

Figure 3-53: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for above shelf installations

Figure 3-54: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for under shelf installations


To install the PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray:

Install the PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray in the rack one mounting hole above/under the ADR10000 shelf (according to the location of the PIM2-63S) and fasten it to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.

Installing the FST

The FST must be installed 50 mm above the fiber guide. If additional equipment is installed above the FST (like another ADR10000 platform), an additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such equipment.

To install the FST in the rack:

1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.

2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform. When preparing the fibers, refer to the safety information in Installing ADR10000: Before You Start Safety Guidelines (page 1-1).

3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.

4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack.

5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull the FST towards you to open it.

NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open fully so you can thread the fibers.


6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 3-55: Threading optical fibers in the FST

NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside the FST and fastened with Velcro strips.

7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.

8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a cable is disconnected.

The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm. Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission characteristics.


Installing the ODF

Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the following procedures.

The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19 in. and ETSI racks, and the other for 23 in. 7 ft. racks. The 19 in./ETSI rack mount brackets can be used for both ETSI and 19 in. racks.

To attach the rack mount brackets to the ODF:

1. Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mount brackets.

2. Attach each bracket with three screws to the corresponding ODF side panel, as shown in the figure.

Figure 3-56: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF


To connect optical fibers to the ODF:

1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.

Figure 3-57: ODF front panel

Figure 3-58: ODF open view

2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF components.


3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the ODF splice support.

4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.

Figure 3-59: ODF fiber routes

5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.

6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.

7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail, and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.

8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.

NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF, first start filling the slots of the lower splice support. After the slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and continue filling the support slots.

9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step 3.

10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.

11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up till it clicks to the unit.

12. Refer to Attaching rack mount brackets (page 3-93) and secure the user fibers with cable ties to the fiber-fastening bracket at the rear of the ODF.


CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the cable ties.

To install ODF units in a rack:

Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack side rails with four screws.

Installing the OPP

The OPP can be installed in the same rack as the ADR10000 or in other racks according to the site installation requirements.

To mount the OPP in the rack:

1. Attach the OPP to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.

2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform. When preparing the fiber, follow the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment Safety.

3. Label the fibers in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.

4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack or the rack sidewalls of the ETSI B rack.

5. Push the button on the front panel of the OPP to release the latch, and pull the OPP towards you to open it.

NOTE: The OPP has two opening positions. The tray latches with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it fully so that you can thread the fibers.

6. Thread the fibers into the OPP, as illustrated in Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP (page 3-97).

NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside the OPP, and fastened with Velcro strips.

7. Identify the duplex connector position on the duplex connector panel (page 3-97).


8. Connect each equipment fiber to the corresponding network fiber according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform.

9. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.

10. Return the OPP to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector and immediately install a protective cap after a cable is disconnected.

The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 1.4 in. (35 mm). Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission characteristics.

Figure 3-60: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP


In this chapter: Installation Options.......................................................................................... 4-1Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in Racks......................................................... 4-7Grounding the ADR10000 Shelf ................................................................... 4-27

Installation Options ADR10000 shelves can be installed in ETSI A racks, 19" 600 mm deep racks (in consultation with and approved by SAGEMCOM's Mechanical Department), and in ANSI 19" racks. These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.

The ADR10000 can be installed in the racks in an horizontal or vertical position. In addition, the ADR10000 can be expanded with one or two TPUs and an OCU. Different brackets and mechanical adapters are available for attaching the ADR10000 to the rack in each of these positions.

NOTE: By default the ADR10000 comes with brackets for horizontal installation in ETSI A racks. For vertical installation you must remove these brackets, and attach vertical brackets, supplied with the installation kit.

If necessary, contact SAGEMCOM's Customer Support team or your SAGEMCOM sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation requirements.

The following sections describe the installation options of the ADR10000.

4 Platform Installation


Layout of ADR10000 Horizontal Installation in ETSI A Racks

The ADR10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, cable guides for low-order and high-order traffic cables, fiber guides, cable slack tray for cables in the lower section of the ADR10000, FST, and xDDF-21 patch panel, according to the rack installation plan. Typical installations of the ADR10000 in a horizontal position are shown in the following figures.

Figure 4-1: Typical ADR10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack



Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two ADR10000 shelves in an ETSI A rack




Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic ADR10000 shelves in 2200 mm ETSI A rack

ADR-10000

ADR-10000

ADR-10000


Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three ADR10000 shelves with TPUs in 2600 mm ETSI A rack





Layout of ADR10000 Vertical Installation in ETSI A Racks

The ADR10000 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, a cable guides for low-order and high-order traffic cables, a fiber guide, FST, and xDDF-21 patch panel, according to the rack installation plan. A typical installation of the ADR10000 in a vertical position is shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-5: Typical ADR10000 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack

ADR-10000


Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in Racks

The ADR10000 can be installed in the following rack types:

SAGEMCOM's recommended ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm - hereafter referred to as ETSI A), which provides the following benefits:

Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient maintenance of all rack cables, including:

E1 cables

Control cables

Power cables

Data cables

Timing cables

Two ducts on the rack’s front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers

Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders

Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see Environmental Requirements (page 3-2))

Front door for left or right opening mounting

19" 600 mm deep rack (in consultation with and approved by SAGEMCOM's Mechanical Department)

19" ANSI rack (in consultation with and approved by SAGEMCOM's Mechanical Department)

ADR10000 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. For information on the various mounting options, see Rack Installation (page 3-43).

By default, ADR10000 shelves are supplied with brackets for horizontal installation in ETSI A racks. The shelves come empty with no cards or modules installed. Therefore, the installation activities covered in this section include:

Attaching the ADR10000 shelf to a rack. The shelf can be installed in a horizontal or vertical position.

Grounding the ADR10000 shelf.

The installation of the ADR10000 shelf in the vertical position requires a workaround which is described in Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in the Vertical Position (page 4-15).


After these procedures have been completed, the ADR10000 shelf is ready for the installation of:

ECU300/ECU300-F, MXC300, and FCU300 cards, as described in Installing ADR10000 Cards (page 5-1).

I/O modules, as described in Installing ADR10000 Modules.

TPMs in the optional TPU, as described in Installing TPU Modules.

Environmental Considerations

Observe the following guidelines when installing the ADR10000 in racks:

1. Free airflow through the rack must be guaranteed at all times.

2. ADR10000 shelves can be installed in open or closed (with door) racks. When installed in a closed rack, the door must be perforated. An example of a rack with a perforated door is the ETSI A rack shown in the following figure.

3. Always install the first ADR10000 platform in the lower part of the rack, leaving a space of at least 1U from the bottom of the rack.

4. In mixed (horizontal and vertical airflow) equipment installations, always install the equipment with the horizontal airflow in the lower part of the rack, and the equipment with the vertical airflow above it.

5. Leave a space of at least 1U between the upper accessory of the ADR10000 and the next platform.

6. Leave as much space as possible between the rack’s cable supports and the ADR10000 sidewalls.

7. Always consider the platform airflow requirements when organizing the cable and fiber routes near the ADR10000 sidewalls.


Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view


Typical ADR10000 Installation

In addition to the ADR10000 shelf itself, the equipment installed in the rack includes:

One Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) installed at the top of the rack, used to connect external power and alarm monitoring lines to the ADR10000 shelves installed in the rack. One of the following is suitable:

xRAP-D - fully supports up to two ADR10000 shelves

xRAP-100 - fully supports one ADR10000 shelf and three ADR smaller shelves (like ADR30G)

RAP-BG - supports one ADR10000 shelf

RAP-4B - supports one ADR10000 shelf

In addition to the space needed for installing the RAP, you must leave at least 50 mm free space under it for routing cables.

Fiber Storage Tray (FST). A separate FST can be installed above each ADR10000 with optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels, enabling the fiber to be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at least 50 mm free space between the ADR10000 cabling accessories and its FST, and another 50 mm free between the FST and the next ADR10000 shelf.

Cable guide. Two units should be installed, one just above the ADR10000 and one under it, to help neatly route the cables connected to the shelf.

Two fiber guides, installed one above the upper cable guide and one under the lower cable guide. Helps to neatly route fibers, while keeping the minimum allowed bend radius.

Cable slack tray. One unit should be installed under the lower fiber guide, to help organize the slacks of cables connected to the lower module cage and lower TPU.

xDDF-21 (optional). A separate xDDF-21 panel can be used when unbalanced 75 Ω interfaces need to be connected and converted to balanced 120 Ω interfaces of PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B, and PIM2_63S modules. Leave at least 100 mm free space above the ADR10000 shelf and below the xDDF-21.

NOTE: If not otherwise specified ADR10000 shelf installations in racks shown in this manual refer to 2200 mm ETSI A racks.


Figure 4-7: Typical ADR10000 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack



Integrating ADR10000 Shelves and Other Equipment in One Rack

ADR10000 shelves and associated accessories may not occupy the entire rack. Additional equipment may be installed in the remaining rack space, provided that any heat generated by additional equipment can efficiently be dissipated, and that thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units installed in the same rack.

In the event of additional equipment being installed on the rack, contact SAGEMCOM’s Customer Support team for assistance.


Figure 4-8: Typical installation of ADR10000 and ADR30G shelves in an ETSI A rack


ADR30G with TPU


Figure 4-9: Typical installation of ADR10000 shelves in an ETSI A rack


ADR120G with two TPUs


Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in the Horizontal Position

The ADR10000 shelf comes with brackets ready for installation in ETSI A racks in the horizontal position.

To install an ADR10000 shelf in the horizontal position in an ETSI A rack:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the ADR10000 shelf in the rack in accordance with the rack installation plan.

2. Place the ADR10000 shelf in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.

3. If required, based on the site installation plan, see Installing the FST (page 3-91) for instructions on installing an FST above the ADR10000 accessories.

Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in the Vertical Position

Before installing the ADR10000 shelf (in the vertical position), in an ETSI A rack, you must prepare it by performing the following steps:

Remove the horizontal installation brackets.

Install the lower vertical bracket.

Attach the vertical filter housing.

Install the upper vertical bracket.

Insert the vertical air filter.

The components required for the vertical installation are supplied in the installation kit. The procedures required for preparing the ADR10000 for vertical installation follow.

CAUTION: When installing an ADR10000 shelf vertically, pay attention to position the shelf with the FCU300 facing downwards. This is important to ensure proper ventilation of the ADR10000 shelf.


To remove the ADR10000 shelf horizontal brackets:

1. Place the ADR10000 shelf on a flat clean surface.

2. Remove the four screws fastening the horizontal bracket to the right side of the shelf.

3. Repeat step 2 for the bracket on the left side of the shelf.

NOTE: The sides of the ADR10000 shelf described hereafter refer to the product installed in the vertical position. For example, the lower (or bottom) side of the shelf is the side near the FCU300.

To install the vertical lower bracket:

1. Orient the ADR10000 shelf on a flat clean surface upside down.

2. Place the vertical lower bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket with the corresponding holes in the shelf.


3. Identify the two long screws and nine short screws according to the following figure.

Figure 4-10: Installing the vertical lower bracket

4. Fasten the lower bracket to the shelf with two long screws and nine short screws from the installation kit.


To prepare the filter frame assembly:

1. Identify the filter frame assembly parts according to the following figure.

Figure 4-11: Preparing the filter frame assembly

2. Insert the filter frame pin guides into the corresponding holes in the frame support.

3. Attach the frame support to the filter frame.


To install the filter frame assembly:

1. Place the filter frame assembly at the rear of the lower bracket.

2. Insert the two front screws of the filter frame into the corresponding latch-shaped holes in the bracket.

3. Identify the four long screws according to the following figure.

Figure 4-12: Installing the filter frame assembly

4. Attach the filter frame to the shelf and fasten it with four long screws from the installation kit.


To install the vertical upper bracket:

1. Return the ADR10000 shelf to normal position.

2. Place the shelf near the edge of the surface to enable the lower bracket to protrude out.

3. Place the vertical upper bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket with the corresponding holes in the shelf.

Figure 4-13: Installing the vertical upper bracket

4. Fasten the upper bracket to the shelf with seven screws and washers from the installation kit.


To attach the thumbnuts:

1. Lift both filter frame front screws to their upmost position.

2. Take two thumbnuts from the installation kit and fasten them on the screws.

Figure 4-14: Installing the thumbnuts


To attach an ADR10000 shelf to a rack in the vertical position:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the ADR10000 shelf in the rack in accordance with the rack installation plan.

WARNING: To perform this procedure safely, for both personnel and equipment, get help from an additional person.

2. Place the ADR10000 shelf in the prescribed position in the rack.

3. Align the holes on the ADR10000's brackets with the holes at the rack's side rails.

4. Attach the shelf to the rack on the upmost hole of the left bracket, and lowest hole of the right bracket, with two screws and washers.

5. Secure the shelf to the rack with additional three screws and washers in each bracket.


Installing the Vertical Air Filter

Normally, the filter frame is attached in its upmost position by two thumbnuts. The frame must be lowered in order to gain access to the filter guides and to install the filter.

To lower the filter frame:

1. Open the two thumbnuts until the filter frame screws are free to move.

Figure 4-15: Releasing the thumbnuts


2. Lower the filter frame screws to their very lowest position, to bring the filter guides in front of the opening in the lower bracket.

Figure 4-16: Lowering the filter frame


The following figure shows the filter frame in the lower position.

Figure 4-17: Filter frame in lower position


To insert the vertical filter:

1. Identify the filter's air intake side indicated by two coding tabs.

2. Place the filter in front of the slot with the coding tabs facing downward.

Figure 4-18: Inserting the air filter

3. Insert the filter into the filter frame guides.

4. Push the filter in until it stops.

5. Lift the thumbnuts up and fasten them in place.


Grounding the ADR10000 Shelf

Before you start:

Review the grounding requirements specified in Grounding Requirements (page 1-7) and Preparing Cables and Fibers (page 3-8). Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the grounding connections in accordance with these requirements.

WARNING:

The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as the xRAP power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power cable is thick, the grounding cable must match that thickness.

The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the thickness of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.


To ground the ADR10000:

1. Connect the rack grounding stud to the site grounding bar, as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 4-19: ADR10000 shelf and rack grounding


2. Connect the RAP grounding post to the rack grounding stud.

3. When NEBS compliance is required, for each ADR10000 shelf installed in the rack, connect a grounding strap from the two shelf grounding posts to the RAP grounding post. Note that the grounding strap lug must be inserted over both grounding posts.

WARNING: To prevent possible damage to ADR equipment, all racks and equipment must be completely grounded before connecting to the platform any external devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V). All grounding procedures described here must be completed before, for example, connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE management system.


In this chapter: Installing ADR10000 Cards ............................................................................ 5-1Installing ADR10000 Modules...................................................................... 5-12Installing TPU Modules................................................................................. 5-21Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR10000 Shelf ............................................. 5-28

Installing ADR10000 Cards After the shelf has been installed and grounded, you can install the cards.

Before you start:

When installing cards, make sure to carefully align the card with the shelf guide rails. Hold the card straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent cards/modules.

CAUTION:

If you feel resistance when inserting cards, immediately retract the card and repeat the process.

Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening card screws.

5 Card and Module Installation


FCU300 Card

The FCU300 card is installed in the rightmost vertical slot of the ADR10000.

Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU300

To install the FCU300 card:

1. Check that the FCU300 has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.

2. Remove the FCU300 from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.

3. Record the hardware version indicated on the unit’s identification label.

4. Insert the rear end of the FCU300 into the card guides.

5. Push the FCU300 in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the fan unit out and repeat the procedure.

6. Secure the FCU300 in place by tightening the two captive screws.


ECU300/ECU300-F Card

The ECU300/ECU300-F card is installed in the bottom horizontal slot of the card cage. Installation is identical for the ECU300/ECU300-F cards.

Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F

CAUTION: Take care not to change the position of the ECU300/ECU300-F switches when inserting or removing a card. Always hold the ECU300/ECU300-F by grasping the sides of the card without touching any of the internal electronics or front panel switches and connectors.

To install the ECU300/ECU300-F card:

1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.

2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.

3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the card’s identification labels.

4. Insert the rear end of the ECU300/ECU300-F into the card guides.

5. Push the ECU300/ECU300-F in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.


6. Secure the ECU300/ECU300-F in place by tightening the two captive screws.

MXC300 Card

The ADR10000 shelf always operates as redundant platforms, therefore each shelf must be equipped with two MXC300 cards installed, one in slot MXC-A (main card) and one in slot MXC-B (protection card).

Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC300

CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting an MXC300 into the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown locks outward first, then pull/push both handles simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.

To install the MXC300 card:





4. Press both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the handles.

5. Simultaneously push both handles forward.

6. Insert the rear end of the MXC300 card into the card guides.

7. If the NVM card was not installed in the MXC300, install it as follows:

a. Check that the NVM card has not been physically damaged during shipment.

b. Remove the NVM from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipment. Report any problems.

Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC300

c. Orient the NVM card against the dedicated slot on the MXC300, and then insert its rear end (the end with the connector) in the card guides. Push the card in until it is locked in place.

NOTE: If the NVM lock is not properly fastened, there is no access to read/write and the system emits an NVM “Cardout” alarm.

d. Place the NVM cover on the slot, and fasten it with its two captive screws.

8. Push the front panel of the MXC300 in until the extractor handles start to move inside, the card mates the chassis connectors, and the front of the card is flush with the front of the shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.


9. Turn the two extractor handles simultaneously to the horizontal position to lock the card in place.

10. Secure the MXC300 in place by tightening the two captive screws.

NOTE: Make sure that card is properly locked in place. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the shelf.

If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs blink simultaneously, the MXC300 is not mounted correctly or the extractor handles are not properly locked.

CAUTION: When replacing any MXC300 card:

The brown levers on the extractor handles operate microswitches that indicate to the ADR10000 platform that the MXC300 card is installed. These levers must be pressed first when replacing an MXC300.

WARNING:

To reset the system using the RESET button, you must first remove the NVM cover.

To extract the NVM, press the release pushbutton using the cover as a tool.


Quad I/O Cards

Quad I/O cards can be installed in two dedicated slots (QA, QB) called quad slots (as they occupy the space of four I/O module slots) in the ADR10000. When quad I/O cards are not needed, these slots can be utilized to install SIM16_1 modules by adding a mechanical adapter.

Figure 5-5: Installing a quad I/O card

NOTE: When quad I/O cards or SIM16_1 modules are not installed in slots QA, QB, the openings must be covered with blank panels to avoid cooling air escape and comply with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).


To install a quad I/O card:




CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a quad I/O card into the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.

4. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the handles.

5. Insert the rear end of the quad I/O card into the card guides.

6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.

7. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place.

8. Secure the quad I/O card in place by tightening the two captive screws.

9. Install the SFP/XFP transceivers according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (page 5-17).


Installing Quad I/O Cards in Quad I/O Slots

Quad I/O cards (like SIM64_XFP, SIM 16_4 etc) can also be installed in a quad of I/O slots (I1 to I4, I5 to I8, I9 to I12, and I13 to I16). To do so you must prepare the quad I/O slots to accommodate the card by removing the three I/O module guides between the slots and attaching an adapter on both sides.

To prepare quad I/O slots for a quad I/O card installation:

1. Identify the quad I/O slots to be adapted for quad I/O card installation.

2. Identify the module guide to be removed, and remove the screw in front of the guide.

3. Gently pull the module guide out.

Figure 5-6: Removing a module guide


4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the two other module guides.

5. Identify the quad I/O card right adapter according to the following figure.

Figure 5-7: Installing the quad I/O card right adapter

6. Attach the adapter to the right side of the quad I/O slots with two screws from the installation kit as shown in the figure above.

7. Identify the left card adapter according to the following figure.

Figure 5-8: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter

8. Attach the adapter to the left side of the quad I/O slots with two screws from the installation kit as shown in the figure above.


To install a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots:




4. Check that the quad I/O slots have been prepared to accommodate the quad I/O card, as described in To prepare quad I/O slots for a quad I/O card installation (page 5-9).

CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a quad I/O card into the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.

5. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the handles.

6. Insert the rear end of the card into the card guides.

Figure 5-9: Installing a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots

7. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.


8. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place.

9. Secure the card in place by tightening the two captive screws.

10. Install the SFP/XFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (page 5-17).

Installing ADR10000 Modules This section describes the installation process for all ADR10000 modules. For a list and technical description of all available modules, refer to the Product Line Reference Manual, General Description, and ADR Technical Specifications.

The installation procedure for each type of module is as follows:

Install I/O modules, including:

Optical and electrical modules (see Installing, Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (page 5-12))

OHU module (see Installing the OHU Module (page 5-19))

Double-slot modules (see Installing Double-Slot Modules (page 5-19))

The optical I/O and optical aggregate modules use Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers. The insertion of SFPs in the module slots is described in Installing, Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (page 5-12).

NOTE: You can install any combination of the different types of I/O modules in the I/O modules cages.

Installing, Optical, CWDM, and Electrical I/O Modules

The following procedure can also be used to replace cards and modules in an operating shelf, provided the general safety precautions listed in Work and Equipment Safety and the module-specific warnings listed in the Product Line Reference Manual for each module are strictly followed. Before starting, make sure that all the I/O modules specified for installation in the ADR10000 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.


All I/O modules are installed in slots I1 through I16, as shown in the following figure. In addition, if I/O cards are not installed in the wide slots (QA, QB), a SIM16_1 module can be installed in each of these positions, by adding a mechanical adapter. This section describes the installation of the electrical, optical, and CWDM I/O modules, which are single-slot modules. The installation of PIM2_63/B and MCSMs, which are double-slot modules, is described in Installing Double-Slot Modules (page 5-19).

In general, to facilitate easy cable routing, it is preferable to install all electrical modules on the one side of the ADR10000 shelf (left or right), and all optical and CWDM modules on the other side.

If you are employing a TPU 1:1 protection scheme, electrical modules that have TPU protection should be arranged in pairs, one below the other. For 1:2 and 1:3 protection schemes, it is recommended that all electrical I/O modules be installed on one side of the ADR10000 shelf, in slots I1, I2, I5, and I6, or in slots I3, I4, I7, and I8 in the upper module cage, and I9, I10, I13, and I14, or in slots I11, I12, I15, and I16 in the lower module cage.

CAUTION:

When installing optical modules, make sure all SFP transceiver slots are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the cover until an SFP is inserted.

For your safety, to comply with electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements and to prevent escape of ventilation from the fans through these openings, protect all unused slots with blank panels.


Figure 5-10: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots

To install an I/O electrical, optical, or CWDM module in the module cages:

1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.

2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.

3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the module’s identification labels.

4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding module guides.

5. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.

CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully align it with the cage guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the process.


Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components on adjacent modules.

6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.

7. If you are installing an optical, CWDM, or mixed module with SFP transceivers, proceed to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards. (page 5-17)

After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.

Installing SIM16_1 modules in quad slots

The quad slots QA and QB can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 each by installing a mechanical adapter.

Figure 5-11: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter

To install the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter:

1. Check that the adapter has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the packaging bag of the original packaging is sealed.


2. Remove the adapter from its protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.

3. Insert the rear end of the adapter into the card guides.

4. Push the adapter in until the front of it is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. If you feel resistance before the adapter is in place, pull it out and repeat the procedure.

5. Secure the adapter in place by tightening the two captive screws.

To install a SIM16_1 module in a quad slot:

1. Check that the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter is properly installed in the corresponding quad slot.

2. Check that the SIM16_1 module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.



5. Insert the rear end of the SIM16_1 into the module guides in the mechanical adapter.

6. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with the front of the adapter. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.

CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully align it with the adapter guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the process.

Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull or push it slowly and carefully until it is in the correct position.

7. Fasten the module to the adapter by tightening the two fastening screws. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.

8. Install the SFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (page 5-17).


Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards

CAUTION: During the installation of SFP/XFP transceivers in optical or CWDM modules and cards, make sure that all optical LC connectors are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the covers until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector.

To install SFP/XFP transceivers in optical or CWDM I/O modules and cards:

1. Identify the prescribed position on the module according to the site installation plan.

2. Check that the SFP/XFP has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.

3. Remove the SFP/XFP from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.

4. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the SFP/XFP identification labels.

5. Remove the protective covers from the slot and from the SFP/XFP transceiver.

6. Insert the rear end of the transceiver into the slot guides, and push slowly backwards to mate the connectors until the transceiver clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the transceiver and repeat the procedure.

Figure 5-12: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module

CAUTION: All slots that are not in use must remain covered. If you have to replace a module or card, remove the SFP/XFP


first.

Expanding a PIM2_21 I/O Slot to 42 E1s

An I/O slot that accommodates a PIM2_21 can be expanded to 42 E1s by replacing it with a PIM2_42 and reassigning the slot as PIM2_42 through management.

Before you start:

Check that the items required for the expansion are available, including:

PIM2_42 module

Adapter cable between traffic cable connected to the PIM2_21 (that is disconnected) and the connector on the PIM2_42

Traffic cable for connecting the additional 21 E1s from the PIM2_42 and the customer's DDF

To expand a PIM2_21 to 42 E1s:

1. Identify the PIM2_21 I/O slot to be expanded.

2. Disconnect the double SCSI connector from the PIM2_21.

3. Open the two captive screws, fastening the PIM2_21 to the ADR10000, and pull the module out.

4. Install the PIM2_42 in the slot of the removed module, as described in To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage.

5. Connect the end of the adapter with the double SCSI connector to the traffic cable removed from the PIM2_21 in step 2.

6. Connected the other end of the adapter cable with the 100-pin SCSI connector to the upper connector on the PIM2_42 (marked 1-21).

7. Connect the traffic cable for the additional 21 E1s to the lower connector on the PIM2_42 (marked 22-42). The other end of this cable is open, and should be connected to the customer's DDF.


Installing the OHU module

The OHU installation is identical to the installation of I/O modules described in To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage.

Installing Double-Slot Modules

Before you start:

Make sure that all the double-slot modules (PIM2_63S or MCSMs) specified for installation in the ADR10000 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan, are available.

Figure 5-13: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the ADR10000

Because the PIM 2_63s and MCSMs occupy a pair of slots each, before you can install them you must first remove the guide between the pair of slots.


To remove a module guide from the lower row of slots:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing and remove the screw from the front of the guide.

2. Gently pull the module guide out.

Figure 5-14: Removing the module guide

CAUTION: Do not allow the metal part you are removing to touch any modules or other parts of the ADR10000 cage. This may cause a short-circuit and damage the modules.

To install a double-slot module in the modules cage:




4. Identify the assigned slot and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding module guides.

5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the module is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.


6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws.

7. If you are installing MCSMs with SFP transceivers, proceed to Installing, Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (page 5-12).

NOTE: Only FE SFP transceivers can be inserted into FE ports; you can insert either GbE SFP or FE SFP transceivers into GbE/FE ports.

8. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.

Installing TPU Modules This section provides instructions for:

Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf (page 5-22)

Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-23)

Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU (page 5-24)

Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-25)

Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-27)

Before you start:

Make sure that the TC/TCF module and all the TPMs specified for installation in the ADR10000 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.


Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf

The TC/TCF module is installed in the right slot of the TPU.

Figure 5-15: Inserting the TC module (ADR10000)

To install a TC/TCF module in the TPU:




4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding TC/TCF module guides.

5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the module is flush with the front of the ADR10000 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the TC/TCF module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.



Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of single-slot (1:1 protection) modules. The installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules is described in Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-25).

Figure 5-16: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR10000)

To install a single-slot TPM in the TPU:








7. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.

Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU

NOTE: When optical amplifiers are installed in the TPU, you must install a TCF to allow sufficient cooling air flow through the amplifiers. The management system will block the configuration of optical amplifiers, if a TCF is not installed.

The installation of optical amplifiers in the TPU is identical to the installation of a single-slot TPM in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-23).


Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules. Double-slot modules can be placed in slot pairs TPM1 and TPM2 or TPM3 and TPM4. Before you can install a double-slot TPM, you must first remove the module guide between the two slots.

Figure 5-17: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR10000)


To remove a TPM guide:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing.

2. Remove the two uppermost screws and the two lowest screws from the front of the TPM guide.

3. Gently pull the TPM guide out.

Figure 5-18: Removing a TPM guide

To install a double-slot TPM in the TPU:







7. After inserting all modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.


Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of triple-slot (1:2 protection) modules, which are accommodated in slots TPM1, TPM2, and TPM3 (slot TPM4 remains free).

Before you start:

1. Before installing a triple-slot TPM, remove the two module guides between the three slots. See To remove a TPM guide (page 5-26).

2. Make sure that all the TPMs specified for installation in the ADR10000 in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.

Figure 5-19: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (ADR10000)


To install a triple-slot TPM in the TPU:







7. After inserting the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.

Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR10000 Shelf

The ADR10000 shelf can be expanded with one or two TPU expansion shelves.

The TPU can be attached on top of the ADR10000 and/or directly under it. Alternatively, a single OCU expansion shelf can be attached directly on top of the ADR10000 or on top of a TPU that is installed on the ADR10000.

NOTE: The OCU cannot be installed under the ADR10000 shelf.

When you order an ADR10000 system with one or two TPUs, the shelf is supplied with the TPUs installed and their fastening brackets attached to each one. The same applies to OCU shelves.


If your ADR10000 shelf does not include TPU protection, it is possible to upgrade your system and add one or two TPUs and an OCU at a later stage, provided you have left space on the rack for this possibility. You need at least 150 mm space above/under the ADR10000 for each TPU/OCU.

The TPUs can be installed without disconnecting any of the ADR10000 cables and fibers and without affecting traffic not going via a TPU.

CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an SAGEMCOM trained field engineer.

Installing a TPU/OCU on the ADR10000 shelf

The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU/OCU on top of an ADR10000 shelf.

To install a TPU on top of the ADR10000 shelf:

1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.

2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.

3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf’s identification labels.

4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the ADR10000 so that they will not unintentionally be disconnected when the TPU is inserted on the rack.


5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU connector in place (located at the back right corner, on the top of the ADR10000 shelf). Remove the cover.

Figure 5-20: Removing the TPU connector from the ADR10000

6. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the ADR10000 shelf.

Figure 5-21: Inserting the TPU connector onto the ADR10000

7. Orient the TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface.


8. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides on the bottom of the TPU.

9. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into the TPU.

Figure 5-22: Installing the pin guides in the TPU

10. Turn the TPU back to normal position.

11. Carefully lower the TPU onto the ADR10000 shelf, taking care that the pin guides are inserted into the slots as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 5-23: Lowering the TPU onto the ADR10000

12. Insert the three long screws, supplied with the installation kit, into the appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU in place.


Figure 5-24: Securing the TPU onto the ADR10000

13. Insert the TC module in the TPU, as described in Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf (page 5-22).

14. Insert the TPMs in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-23) and Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (page 5-25).

15. If the I/O modules to be protected by the TPU are already connected to traffic cables, disconnect them.

16. Connect the TPMs to the relevant I/O modules, as described in Installing TPU Modules (page 5-21).

CAUTION: Insert/extract the TPU in/from an ADR10000 only when it is empty (no TC/TCF or TPMs are assembled in it).

Installing a TPU under the ADR10000 Shelf

The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU under an ADR10000 shelf.

To install a TPU under the ADR10000 shelf:

1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.



3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf’s identification labels.

4. Turn the ADR10000 shelf so that its rear faces the front.

5. Lift the ADR10000 on its far lower edge to gain access to the bottom surface, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-25: Installing the ADR10000 pin guides and removing the lower connector cover

6. Open the two captive screws fastening the lower TPU connector cover to the shelf. Remove the cover.

7. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the shelf (see the figure above).

8. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely in place.

9. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the ADR10000 shelf (see installation of the H-connector in Inserting the TPU connector onto the ADR10000 (page 5-30)). Note that the connector should be installed with the angled corner facing backwards.

10. Open the two screws securing the TPU connector cover (located at the back right corner, on top of the TPU). Remove the cover.

11. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the TPU shelf (keep the screws handy). Remove the bracket.

12. Orient the TPU on a clean flat surface, upside down.


13. Place the TPU's fastening bracket (removed in step 12) on the TPU and attach it with the six screws.

Figure 5-26: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector

14. Open the two captive screws fastening the second connector cover to the TPU. Remove the cover.

15. Take the jumper connector from the installation kit and insert it into the connector house.

16. Fasten the jumper connector in place with three screws from the installation kit.


17. Turn the TPU back to regular position.

18. Carefully lower the ADR10000 shelf onto the TPU, taking care that the pin guides are inserted into the slots, as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 5-27: Lowering the ADR10000 onto the TPU

19. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU in place.

Figure 5-28: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf


Adding a Second TPU/OCU

If your ADR10000 already has a TPU/OCU, it is possible to upgrade your system and add an additional TPU/OCU cage on top of the first, provided you have left space on the rack for this possibility. There should be a space of at least 150 mm above the expanded ADR10000 for installing the TPU/OCU.

The second TPU/OCU cage can be installed without disconnecting any of the expanded ADR10000 system cables and fibers, and without affecting traffic that is not going via the TPU/OCU.

CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an SAGEMCOM trained field engineer.

To install an additional TPU/OCU on the expanded ADR10000 shelf:

1. Check that the additional TPU/OCU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.


3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf identification labels.

4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the expanded ADR10000 so that they will not unintentionally be disconnected when the additional TPU/OCU is inserted on the rack.

5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU/OCU connector in place (located at the back right corner on the top of the first TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure). Remove the cover.


Figure 5-29: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the first TPU/OCU

6. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the first TPU/OCU shelf installed on the expanded ADR10000 (see the previous figure).

7. Open the two screws fastening the bracket to the rack. Remove the bracket.

8. Orient the second TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface.

9. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the second TPU.

10. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into the TPU.

Figure 5-30: Installing the pin guides in the TPU


11. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the first TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-31: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU in the ADR10000


12. Carefully lower the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR10000 (on the first TPU/OCU shelf), taking care that the pin guides are inserted into the slots as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 5-32: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR10000

13. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the second TPU/OCU in place.

Figure 5-33: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded ADR10000


In this chapter: Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks ............................................. 6-1

Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks

In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers should be routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack. Traffic cables from the lower part of the ADR10000 shelf (lower module cage and lower TPU) should be routed through the cable guide, and the surplus folded on the cable slack tray.

6 Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing


Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack


Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the MXC300 cards.

To connect power cables:

NOTE: To facilitate power cables routing, it is recommended to start from the ADR10000 shelf towards the RAP.

1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the POWER connector of the MXC300 in slot MXC-A, and fasten it with its two screws.

2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable, and thread it through the opening in the left bracket of the ADR10000 shelf.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the corresponding MXC300 in slot MXC-B.

4. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack. Pull the cables until the cable connectors are positioned against the appropriate connectors on the RAP.

5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.

NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation procedure is described in Installing the xRAP-100 (page 3-65), and the xRAP-D installation is described in Installing the xRAP-D (page 3-50).

6. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the RAP.

CAUTION: Do not extract/insert an MXC300 card while the DC cables are connected to it.


Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the ECU300/ECU300-F front panel.

To connect alarm cables:

1. Route the alarm cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to the appropriate ADR10000 shelf (see "Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks" page 6-1).

NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation procedure is described in Installing the xRAP-100 (page 3-65), and the xRAP-D installation is described in Installing the xRAP-D (page 3-50).

2. Pull each cable down to level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate alarm connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F.

3. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.

4. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F front panel.


Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules and Cards

All optical fibers in the ADR10000 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on the SFP/XFP transceivers.

Before you start:

Before installing the ADR10000 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be routed through the conduits running along the front supports of SAGEMCOM’s recommended rack. From the conduits, the fibers should be routed into the FSTs installed above and under (in horizontal installations) the ADR10000 shelf you are installing and threaded into the FST, as described in Installing the FST (page 3-91).



To connect an optical fiber to an ADR10000 module/card:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the FST out towards you.

2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the tray.

NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it fully.

3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.

4. At the desired level lead the end through the appropriate slot of the conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.

5. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.


6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved cleaning kit.

7. Remove the cover from the module/card connector, and connect the fiber connector to the module/card connector.

8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for all optical modules/cards in the ADR10000 shelf.

9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules/cards, gently push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.

Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules

NOTE: The procedures in this section describe the connection of traffic cables directly to I/O modules in the ADR10000 shelf. If your installation includes a TPU protection scheme, some of the cables will be connected to the relevant TPM in the TPU instead of to the I/O module, according to the site installation plan.

Connection of the I/O modules to the TPMs is described in Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU (page 6-19).

Routing and connecting multipair cables

Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces located on the PIM2_21, PIM2_63, and PIM2_63S electrical connection modules. One or three pairs of cables are connected to the module, respectively.

Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or receive). The cable end connecting to the ADR10000 shelf is terminated in 2 x 50-pin SCSI male connectors, or 2 x 136-pin VHDCI male connectors (for PIM2_63S).

If you are using an xDDF-21 patch panel, suitable cables should be routed from the relevant xDDF-21 patch panel to the ADR10000 shelf location. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing. Note that the cable must be connected to the rear of the patch panel before it is secured in place.


To connect multipair cables:

1. Arrange the multipair traffic cables and route them through the cable guides attached to the rack side rails.

2. Pull each multipair cable down to the level of the corresponding electrical connection module.

3. Leave a spare length of 20 cm to 30 cm of cable folded on top of the shelf (for modules in the upper module cage) or on the cable slack tray (for modules in the lower module cage) for future maintenance purposes.

4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and through the appropriate opening of the cable guide serving the shelf, until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate slot. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.

5. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate module connectors with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if necessary.

6. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding module.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the cable connector, as this may damage the module.

7. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver (maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N cm.

Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S

The PIM2_63S has a special 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting to its 63 x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by SAGEMCOM is used to make the connection.

The cable is constructed of three main parts:

Double 136-pin VHDCI male connector with six 30AWG cable tails

Conversion cable-size box

Three pairs of 26AWG cables


The following figure shows the PIM2_63S traffic cable.

Figure 6-2: PIM2_63S traffic cable

The six 30AWG cables connect on one side to the double 136-pin VHDCI connector and on the other side to the conversion box. The conversion box connects between the six 30AWG wires and three pairs of 26AWG wires, making the wire-size conversion. The 26AWG cables are connected at the other end to the customer's DDF. Each cable in a pair is bonded to the other, shaping a figure-eight pattern.

Each pair of the 26AWG cables carries 21 E1s totaling 63 E1s; to facilitate identification of the E1 groups each cable pair is marked with color strips along its jacket, according to the following key:

First pair, E1s No. 1 to 21 - Red strips

Second pair, E1s No. 22 to 42 - Blue strips

Third pair, E1s No. 43 to 63 - Yellow strips


Routing and Connecting the Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S

The PIM2_63S has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting to its 63 x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by SAGEMCOM is used to make the connection. For a detailed description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S (page 6-7). The connector on the cable has a pin guide that must be inserted into the corresponding hole, to the upper right side of PIM2_63S connector.

Special box trays installed above and below the ADR10000 shelf help neatly route of the PIM2_63S cables. These units enable to keep the path of the cables in the short rout between the module on the shelf and the conversion box (on the cable). In addition, the organized installation and route of the cables ensure smooth closure of the rack's door.

To connect the PIM2_63S traffic cable:

1. Identify the pin guide on the traffic cable connector and the corresponding hole on the PIM2_63S.

2. Insert the pin guide into the corresponding hole near the PIM2_63S connector.

3. Gently push the cable connector into the corresponding PIM2_63S connector. If resistance is felt before the connectors are mate, pull the connector out and repeat the procedure.

4. Secure the connector in place by tightening its four captive screws.


Figure 6-3: PIM2_63S traffic cable installation

To route the PIM2_63S traffic cable:

1. Bend the cables from the connector installed in the previous procedure towards the cable guide on the box tray (see the preceding figure).

2. Insert a cable tie into the corresponding holes in the cable guide; route the cables through the cable tie and tighten it on the cables.

3. Route the cables inside the tray and insert the box grooves into the corresponding guides in the tray (see the preceding figure).

4. Route the long part of the cables coming from the box towards the rack side rails.

5. Fasten the cables to the rack side rails with cable ties as necessary.


Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel

The xDDF-21 is installed above the ADR10000 shelf accessories.

To install an xDDF-21 patch panel:

1. Route the 2 x 50-pin SCSI cables leading from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B along the side of the rack to the location where the xDDF-21 patch panel will be installed.

2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and should be connected to their respective connectors.

3. Leaving at least 100 mm free space above the ADR10000 shelf accessories and below the xDDF-21, attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure, using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.

4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the inside of the panel door.

Routing and connecting coaxial cables

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on PIM345_3, and SIM1_4/E modules. Depending on the module type, a maximum of eight cables can be connected to each module.

As part of site preparations, suitable cables should be routed from the relevant High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended rack location, and connected to the coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors supplied with the ADR10000 shelf. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the rack.

To connect coaxial traffic cables to an ADR10000 module:

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups according to the designated module, and route them along the guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate ADR10000 unit.

2. Pull each coaxial cable up or down to the level of the corresponding electrical connection module.


4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.


5. Cut excess cable length if necessary.

6. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding electrical connection connector on the module.

Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the ADR10000

The optional TPU shelf can be mounted on top and/or under the ADR10000 shelf to add I/O protection capability to the platform.

Each Tributary Protection Module (TPM) is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules in the ADR10000 shelf.

If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the TC module in the TPU switches the traffic from the operating I/O module to the protection module.

The TPU has four slots for TPMs. The modules are connected to the main and protection I/O modules by traffic cables, and the client's traffic is connected directly to the TPMs.

TPMs support the electrical PIMs and SIMs with the following protection schemes:

TPMs for a 1:1 protection scheme, where one protection module is connected to a single I/O module

TPMs for a 1:2 protection scheme, where one protection module is connected to one or two I/O modules

TPMs for a 1:3 protection scheme, where one protection module is connected to two or three I/O modules

The TPU connects to a connector on top of the ADR10000 shelf. Similarly the lower TPU connects to a connector at the bottom of the shelf. These connectors provide the power and control buses required for the TPU operation.

The modules in the TPU are distributed as follows:

The rightmost TPU slot is allocated for the TC module. The TC module is described in the Product Line Reference Manual.

The other four slots are used for any combination of TPMs (single slot, double-slot, or triple-slot modules are supported).

The TPMs available for the I/O protection are:

TPM2_1

TPM2_3


TPM2_42_2

TPM2_63_2

TPMH_1

Each TPM is dedicated for protection of a specific traffic rate and protection scheme. The TPM name designates the protected traffic rate and the protection scheme, as follows:

The first digit after the name designates the traffic rate.

The last digit after the underscore designates the protection scheme.

For example, the TPM2_3 is a module for 2 Mbps traffic, and supports a protection scheme of 1:3.

Similarly TPMH_1 is a module for High rate traffic (including 34/45 Mbps and 155 Mbps), and a protection scheme of 1:1.

The following table summarizes the available TPMs, the type of I/O modules they protect, the traffic rate, and the protection scheme.

Table 6-1: ADR10000 protection schemes

TPM Type Protected I/O module Traffic rate Protection scheme

TPM2_1 PIM2_21 2 Mbps 1:1 TPM2_3 PIM2_21 2 Mbps 1:3 TPM2_42_2 PIM2_42 2 Mbps 1:2 TPM2_63_2 PIM2_63/B, PIM2_42,

PIM2_63S 2 Mbps 1:2

TPMH_1 PIM345, SIM1_4/E 34/45 Mbps, 155 Mbps

1:1

In the specific ADR10000 protection schemes, the location of the protection module (P) and the protected module (M) is allocated by the system's management software. Therefore the I/O modules must be installed in the allocated slots, and connected to the corresponding TPMs.

The following sections provide schematic diagrams and tables for the connections of the ADR10000 shelf in the various protection schemes.


ADR10000 1:1 protection scheme connections

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:1 protection scheme for an ADR10000 populated with PIM2_21 modules in the upper and lower module cages and TPM2_1 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in the ADR10000 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main (working) module.

Figure 6-4: ADR10000 1:1 protection scheme example

The following table shows the slot association for 1:1 protection scheme in the ADR10000.

Table 6-2: ADR10000 slots allocation for protection schemes

TPU slots I/O slot allocation Protection Main

M1-1 I1 I5 M1-2 I2 I6 M1-3 I3 I7 M1-4 I4 I8 M3-1 I9 I13 M3-2 I10 I14 M3-3 I11 I15 M3-4 I12 I16


ADR10000 1:2 protection scheme connections (PIM2_63)

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:2 protection scheme for an ADR10000 populated with PIM2_63 modules in the upper and lower module cages and TPM2_63_2 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in the ADR10000 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main (working) module.



Table 6-3: ADR10000 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63)


M1-1, M1-2, and M1-3 I1 and I2 I5 and I6 I7 and I8

M3-1, M3-2, and M3-3 I9 and I10 I13 and I14 I15 and I16


ADR10000 1:2 protection scheme connections (PIM2_63S)

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:2 protection scheme for an ADR10000 populated with PIM2_63S modules in the upper and lower module cages and TPM2_63_2 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in the ADR10000 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main (working) module.

Figure 6-6: ADR10000 1_2 protection scheme example (PIM2_63S)


Table 6-4: ADR10000 1:2 I/O protection (PIM2_63S)


M1-1, M1-2, and M1-3 I1 I5 and I6

M3-1, M3-2, and M3-3 I9 I13 and I14


ADR10000 1:3 protection scheme connections

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:3 protection scheme for an ADR10000 populated with PIM2_21 modules in the upper and lower module cages and TPM2_3 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in the ADR10000 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main (working) module.



Table 6-5: ADR10000 1:3 I/O protection


M1-1 and M1-2 I1 I2, I5, I6 M1-3 and M1-4 I3 I4, I7, I8 M3-1 and M3-2 I9 I10, I13, I14 M3-3 and M3-4 I11 I12, I15, I16


TPM2_42_2 Protection Assignment for the ADR10000

The TPM2_42_2 supports four protection groups of two PIM2_42 cards protected in each.

Figure 6-8: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in ADR10000

The following table describes the slot assignment of the TPM2_42_2 in the TPU and the PIM2_42 in the ADR10000 shelf.

Table 6-6: TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the ADR10000

TPU slots I/O Slot Allocation Protection Main

M1-1 and M1-2 I1 I5 and I6 M1-3 and M1-4 I3 I7 and I8 M3-1 and M3-2 I9 I13 and I14 M3-3 and M3-4 I11 I15 and I16


Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU

The type of cable used to connect the I/O modules to the TPMs depends on the type of I/O module being protected, as follows:

For PIM2_21s, 2 x 50 to 1 x 100 SCSI cables are supplied, to be connected from four different PIM2_21s to connectors PIM2_21 #1, PIM2_21 #2, PIM2_21 #3, and PIM2_21 PROTECT at the bottom of the TPM2_3. Multipair traffic cables are connected to the DDF#1, DDF#2, and DDF#3 connectors at the top of the TPM2_3.

The connection between TPM2_3s and PIM2_21s is shown in the following figure.

Connections are between a connector in the TPM and the corresponding module in the shelf, where “P” denotes protection and 1, 2, and 3 are for reference purposes.


For PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E modules, the supplied cables enable connection from the DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors on the I/O module to the 8W8 MAIN and PROTECT connectors at the bottom of the TPM-H_1. The traffic coaxial cables are connected to the OUT/IN connectors at the top of the TPM-H_1. These connections are shown in the following figure.


NOTE: The cable used to connect the PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E to the TPM-H_1 ends with eight coaxial cables:

When protecting a PIM345_3, six coaxial cables are connected and two remain unused.

When protecting a SIM1_4/E, all eight coaxial cables are connected.

Figure 6-10: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an ADR10000


The following figure shows connection to 252 E1s with 1:2 protection. Six PIM2_63 modules are connected in the ADR10000 shelf protected by two TPM2_63_2 modules in the TPUs.

Figure 6-11: ADR10000 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections


Routing and Connecting Cables to Data Modules (EISMBs/DIOMs/MCSMs)

Depending on the data module in your ADR10000 shelf, data cables with RJ45 connectors or optical fibers with LC connectors are used to connect to the module, as described in the following procedures.

To connect Ethernet cables to a data module:

NOTE: To support the Autonegotiation feature on electrical ports, use CAT5E SFTP 2-pair or 4-pair straight cable to connect 10/100BaseT ports, or CAT5E SFTP 4-pair straight cable to connect 1000BaseT ports.

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the data cables in groups according to the designated data module, and route them along the guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate ADR10000 unit.

2. Pull each data cable up or down to the level of the corresponding data module.


4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and through the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.

5. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector on the data module.


Connecting an optical fiber to a data module

The following procedure describes how to connect an optical fiber to a data module.

Before you start:

Prior to installing the ADR10000 shelf and modules, route all optical fibers through the conduits running along the front supports of the ADR10000’s recommended rack. From the conduits, route the fibers into the FST above the ADR10000 shelf you are installing and thread them into the FST, as described in Installing the FST (page 3-91).



To connect an optical fiber to a data module:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the FST out towards you.

2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the tray.

3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.

4. At the desired level, lead the end through the appropriate slot of the conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.

5. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the SFP transceiver LC connector on the designated data module. Leave some slack to prevent stress.

6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved cleaning kit.

7. Remove the cover from the SFP transceiver, and connect the fiber connector to the SFP connector.

8. Repeat Steps 2 to 7 for all optical data modules in the ADR10000 shelf.


9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules, gently push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.

Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3 and T4 connectors of the ECU300/ECU300-F. Each cable is terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector.

To connect a timing cable to the ADR10000 shelf:

1. Route the timing cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate ADR10000 shelf.

2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate timing connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F.

3. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags, to connectors T3 and T4 on the ECU300/ECU300-F.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ECU300/ECU300-F.

4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.

5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.

Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT on the ECU300/ECU300-F. Each cable is terminated in an RJ-45 plug.

The cable from the management station must be plugged into the MANAGMENT MAIN connector in the ECU300/ECU300-F card.

If more than one shelf has to be connected to the management, a daisy chain interconnection is used to distribute management to the shelves for either ECU300/ECU300-F cards. In this configuration, the cable from the management station is connected to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the first shelf, the PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf is connected to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the second shelf, and so on.


To connect management cables to the ADR10000 shelf equipped with an ECU300/ECU300-F:

1. Route the management cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate ADR10000 shelf.

2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate management connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F.

3. Connect the management station cable to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the first shelf, in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags.

4. If more than one shelf is installed, connect a management cable from the PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the second shelf, and so on.

5. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ECU300/ECU300-F.

6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the shelves.

Tool Kit

SAGEMCOM offers a tool kit to facilitate extraction/insertion of connectors and optical SFP transceivers connected to ports in very high density cabling environments.

The tool kit is packed in a compact box and enables the technical staff to handle installation and maintenance activities in a quick and efficient fashion, without affecting traffic of a neighboring connector that should not be removed.

The kit includes the following tools:

RJ-45 extractor

LC connector extraction/insertion and optical SFP extractor (all in the same tool)

DIN 1.0/2.3 (regular and small profile) connector extractor

Pincers


Extracting RJ-45 connectors

The RJ-45 extractor tool enables easy extraction of RJ-45 connectors located in very high density cabling environments. The extractor is designed to remove connectors connected to modules that include one or two rows of data ports (for example, DIOM_08 and MCSM modules).

The general view of the tool is shown in the following figure.

Figure 6-12: RJ-45 extractor

To extract an RJ-45 connector from an upper port row:

1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6-13: Inserting the cables (upper row)


2. Move extractor forward to attach the far groove to the module's handle.

Figure 6-14: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row)

3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion.

4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector out.

Figure 6-15: Extracting the connector (upper row)


To extract an RJ-45 connector from a lower port row:

1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6-16: Inserting the cables (lower row)

2. Move extractor forward to attach the near groove to the module's handle.

Figure 6-17: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row)


3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion.

4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector out.

Figure 6-18: Extracting the connector (lower row)

Extracting/Inserting LC connectors and SFPs

The LC/SFP extractor is a multipurpose tool enabling the extraction/insertion of LC connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for example, LC connectors cabled near multiple adjacent SFPs). The tool is also designed to extract SFP transceivers.

The following figure shows the LC/SFP extractor.

Figure 6-19: LC/SFP extractor


Before you start:

Identify the LC/SFP extractor according to LC/SFP extractor (page 6-29).

Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's wide end to perform the following procedure.

To extract an LC connector:

1. Insert the fiber near the boot under the extractor's wide end tab.

Figure 6-20: Inserting the fiber into the extractor

2. Push the extractor straight forward and press its release tab onto the SFP's clip, until it clicks over top of the clip.

Figure 6-21: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip


3. Pull out the extractor with the fiber.

Figure 6-22: Extracting the LC connector

4. Move the fiber backward till its connector is beyond the extractor's tab.

Figure 6-23: Moving the connector beyond the tab

5. Remove the fiber from the extractor.

Figure 6-24: Removing the fiber

Before you start:


Fold the SFP extractor lever into tool's wide end. Use the tool's narrow end to perform the following procedure.


To insert an LC connector:

1. Insert the fiber near its boot, under the extractor's narrow end tab. Orient connector's clip in front of the tool's teeth.

Figure 6-25: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end

2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the connector's clip.

Figure 6-26: Moving extractor's end to the connector

3. Insert the connector into the SFP until it locks.

Figure 6-27: Inserting the connector into the SFP

4. Gently pull the extractor back until its edge is beyond the boot.

Figure 6-28: Moving the extractor backward


5. Remove the extractor from the fiber near the boot.

Figure 6-29: Removing the extractor from the fiber

Before you start:


Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's narrow side to perform the following procedure.

To extract an SFP transceiver:

1. Orient the extractor in front of the SFP.

Figure 6-30: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP

2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the SFP.

Figure 6-31: Moving the extractor forward


3. Push the extractor forward to fit SFP's middle partition into extractor's edge slot.

Figure 6-32: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot

4. Move the extractor's teeth to the right (toward the SFP clip).

Figure 6-33: Moving extractor toward SFP clip

5. Pull the extractor slightly backward. Make sure that the clip is grasped and moves with the tool.

Figure 6-34: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip


6. Slide the lever forward to lock the SFP's clip, and press slightly.

Figure 6-35: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth

7. With the clip locked, pull the extractor backward to rotate the clip by` 90°, and release the SFP from its housing.

Figure 6-36: Releasing the SFP from housing

8. Gently pull the SFP and extract it from the housing.

Figure 6-37: Extracting the SFP

NOTE: It is very important to keep the SFPs locked during the last three steps of the procedure.


Extracting/Inserting DIN 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors

The DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor tool enables the extraction/insertion of coaxial connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for example, coaxial connectors cabled near multiple adjacent electrical SFPs).

The following figure identifies the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor.

Figure 6-38: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor

Before you start:

Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (page 6-36).

Use the tool's narrow end to perform the following procedure.


To extract a DIN1.0/2.3 connector:

1. Place the extractor on the coaxial cable in front of the connector.

Figure 6-39: Placing the extractor in front of the connector

2. Push the extractor forward and attach the end tabs on the connector's step.

Figure 6-40: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step


3. Pull the extractor with the connector backward and release the connector.

Figure 6-41: Extracting the connector

Before you start:

Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (page 6-36).

Use the tool's wide end to perform the following procedure.

To insert a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector:

1. Insert the coaxial cable near its boot, under the extractor's wide end tab.

Figure 6-42: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor


2. Pull the cable backward until the connector's edge is stopped by the tab.

Figure 6-43: Positioning the connector in the extractor

3. Push the extractor with the connector forward until it clicks into the SFP.

Figure 6-44: Inserting the connector


4. Gently pull the extractor backward and release it from the cable.

Figure 6-45: Removing the extractor


In this chapter: Overview ......................................................................................................... 7-1Test Equipment................................................................................................ 7-2Site Commissioning Tests ............................................................................... 7-3Network Commissioning Tests ....................................................................... 7-6

Overview The commissioning tests are performed after completing the installation and preliminary configuration of a new network. These procedures confirm that the network has been properly installed and is operating in accordance with the design specifications.

This chapter provides general commissioning procedures for the ADR10000, and provides a basis for preparing tests in specific networks.

The commissioning procedures include:

Site commissioning tests, performed at the site level to ensure proper functionality of the site.

Network commissioning tests, performed at the network level. These include:

SDH commissioning tests, to ensure proper SDH functionality of the integrated network

Data network commissioning tests, to ensure proper data functionality of the integrated network

Optical network commissioning tests, to ensure proper optical functionality of the integrated network

7 Commissioning Tests


The commissioning procedures presented in this chapter include:

Test Equipment

Site Commissioning Tests (page 7-3)

Network Commissioning Tests (page 7-6)

SDH Commissioning Tests (page 7-6)

Data Network Commissioning Tests (page 7-17)

Optical Network Commissioning Tests (page 7-21)

NOTES: Personnel involved in the execution and supervision of commissioning tests must be familiar with the applicable safety precautions and requirements.

Unless otherwise indicated, the tests described in these sections apply to all ADR shelves and to both SDH and SONET.

Test Equipment The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:

Optical power meter (OPM)

Optical spectrum analyzer (recommended for measurements at points carrying multiple wavelengths, for example, inputs and outputs of optical amplifiers)

Optical BER tester

Set of optical attenuators with various values

Variable optical attenuator

FC-to-LC and FC-to-SC adapters

FC/FC optical patch cords

Multimeter


Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers, and therefore no specific test equipment models are listed. You can use any equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and environmental conditions that apply to the specific network. If necessary, contact SAGEMCOM's Field Engineering Department for specific recommendations.

Site Commissioning Tests The site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of ADR10000 network elements. Perform the following procedures on each network element at each site:

Verification of cards and modules installed in each shelf

Visual inspection and mechanical checks

Optical level measurements (see reference data in the ADR10000 System Specifications manual)

Checking Cards and Modules Installed in Each Shelf

This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have been installed in each site, and to record their firmware versions and serial numbers.

The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and modules installed in an ADR10000 shelf.

Table 7-1: Card and module inventory

Card/Module type

Slot Boot version Serial number


NOTES: Make sure that the boot version of each card and module matches the embedded version.

If the equipment is already connected to a management station, use the Inventory window to collect the information and print the relevant data. Refer to the SAGEMCOM management system user manual for detailed instructions.

Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks

The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing and connection of cables, and other tasks related to equipment installation. Refer to:

Equipment Installation (see "Platform Installation" page 4-1) – criteria for proper equipment installation

Site cabling diagram – criteria for proper cabling routing

After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 to 9 in table Visual inspection and mechanical checks), power on the ADR10000 shelves to perform an additional set of acceptance tests (items 10 to 13 in table Visual inspection and mechanical checks). These tests check the functions needed for continuing the execution of the network commissioning tests. Refer to the Product Line Reference Manual for a description of the various card indicators and their functions.

The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual inspection and mechanical check.

Table 7-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks

No. Description of inspection/check Results

1. Check mechanical mounting of the rack. 2. Install the DC power cable (main fuse to RAP; RAP fuse

to shelf).

3. Ground the cable connections. 4. Install the DDF and connect the cables. 5. Install the ODF and connect the cables. 6. Install the network manager station (if applicable). 7. Unpack the cards and insert them into the shelves. 8. Provide DC supply voltage via the first DC source to the

RAP (-40 V to -75 V). ___V

9. Provide DC supply voltage via the second DC source to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).

___V


No. Description of inspection/check Results

10. Power on the shelves. 11. Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources

by disconnecting one source at a time.

12. Check the communication between the shelf and the Craft terminal via the shelf SLIP interface.

13. Check the proper operation of all FCU300s. 14. Check LED operation by pressing the LED TEST

pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F.

15. Check the installation of Cisco ATA-186/Cisco 2600/Call Manager (if applicable).

16. Check slot assignment for all relevant cards. 17. Check that there are no abnormal alarms.

Measuring Optical Levels

These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports. Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels, within the limits specified in the ADR10000 System Specifications, must be achieved for each optical component.

Perform these measurements using an Optical Power Meter (OPM) configured according to the wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable measurement, do not connect the OPM directly to a port but use a 6.6 foot / 2-meter cable. When measuring high optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that the power does not exceed the maximum OPM input level.

The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the optical level measurements.

Table 7-3: Measured optical levels

Slot Module type

Port Wavelength Optical transmit level (dBm)

Receive level (dBm)

The measured power levels are evaluated as follows:


The measured power must be within the range of minimum and maximum levels specified in the ADR10000 System Specifications for the transceiver plug-in type installed on the corresponding port.

The measured power must be within the expected range according to the optical network plan.

If necessary, contact SAGEMCOM's Field Engineering Department for relevant port and optical transceiver plug-in specifications and network planning data. An OK result means that the port meets both criteria.

It is usually sufficient to measure only the optical levels at the transmit and receive ports of I/O cards, transponders, and optical amplifiers installed in each shelf. A good port receive level indicates that the components in the optical path up to that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result is not satisfactory, perform additional measurements at all the other ports along the optical signal paths.

Shelf Power-On Test Procedure

This procedure checks the equipment recovery capability after a power fault.

To power on the NE:

1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the shelf.

2. Turn the shelf circuit breaker off.

3. After 30 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker on.

The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without user intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.

Network Commissioning Tests

SDH Commissioning Tests

These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with the system specifications.


Test equipment setup

The SDH tests are performed using an PDH analyzer, optical power meter, and variable attenuators. Configure the optical power meter according to the measured wavelength.

The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following sections.

2 Mbps tests

For 2 Mbps tributaries, configure the test equipment as follows: Framing Unframed Coding HDB3 Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS Signal rate 2 Mbps Timing Received clock Inject error Code error

34 Mbps tests

For 34 Mbps tributaries, configure the test equipment as follows: Framing Unframed Coding HDB3 Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS Signal rate 34 Mbps Timing Received clock Inject error Code error

45 Mbps tests

For 45 Mbps tributaries, configure the test equipment as follows: Framing Unframed Coding 45 frame = C-bit

X-bit = 11 Pattern 2*10-15 PRBS Signal rate 45 Mbps Timing Received clock Inject error Code error


SDH tests

For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type being tested, as follows: Signal rate STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16 Mapping Any mapping (preferably bulk) Framing Off Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS Timing Received clock Inject error Code error

Network timing synchronization test

This test checks that the ADR10000 NEs synchronize properly and switch to the next priority clock source when a failure occurs.

No. Test procedure Expected results

1. Define one NE as the internal clock to which all other NEs are synchronized (an external source may also be used).

2. Define several priorities for the timing source.

3. Disconnect the Rx fiber connected to the NE serving as the main timing source.

If the NE has a single timing source: An alarm is generated for the main

timing source. NE timing is set in holdover mode.

If the NE has several timing sources: NE timing is synchronized to the

second priority timing source. An alarm is generated for the loss of

the main timing source.

Loss of Signal (LOS) detection test

This test verifies that the NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm notification to the management system for viewing.


1. Create the NEs and links using the management station.



2. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the modules.

A LOS and other alarms generated by the disconnection appear at the SPI level of this module port.

Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the ADR10000 optical modules is according to specification.


1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.

2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports).

3. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant trail, and set the attenuator to 0 dB.

4. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst of errors.

5. Connect an optical power meter to the first Rx point after the variable optical attenuator and measure the total power; the measured optical power level is the input sensitivity of the module.

Verify that the results are in accordance with the ADR10000 System Specifications.


Equipment power-on test

This test verifies that the ADR10000 NEs continue operating properly after a power break, without operator involvement.


1. Create an unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs.


3. Shut off the power to one of the non-gateway NEs within the relevant trail.

Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) alarm appear in the test equipment. After approximately 7 minutes, an "NE disconnected" alarm appears in the management current alarm list, and the NE icon turns gray (no communication).

4. Power on the NE and wait for it to perform initial download to all cards/modules in the shelf. (This can take 20 minutes.) Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there are no relevant alarms in the test equipment or at the management station.

Traffic stability test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards. No. Test procedure Expected results

1. Create an unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs.


3. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the table below.

4. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management station.

You should achieve an error free rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and 1 x 10-12 for all other rates.


Table 7-4: Traffic stability test time intervals

2 Mbps 34/45 Mbps STM-1/VC-3 STM-4/VC-12 STM-16/VC-48

14 hours 7 hours 120 min 30 min 8 min

Path protection and nonretrieval test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.


1. Create one protected trail at any rate between two NEs.


3. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail.

Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.

4. Verify that the trail carries traffic properly on the protection path.

5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail continues using the protection path (non-retrieve mode), and the test equipment indicates no alarm.


MSP test

This test verifies that MSP traffic in the ADR10000 network operates properly when a failure occurs.

MSP can be applied in a point-to-point configuration.


1. Create one unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs.


3. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail.

Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.

4. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path.

5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail remains on the protection path.


MS-SPRing test

This test verifies that the MS-SPRing traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.

This procedure uses a SIM-16 and an MXC card.


1. Define the ring as MS-SPRing Node Links - east and west clockwise.

2. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.


4. Disconnect one of the fibers in the path of the trail.

Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the trail switches to the protection path and operates properly. Management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail and LOS alarms related to the disconnected fibers.

5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The alarms related to the disconnected fibers clear. After the retrieve time (user-definable), the trail switches back to the main path, and short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment.

6. Switch back to the main path. The trail operates properly.


IOP hardware protection test

This test verifies that the traffic defined on a card with hardware protection operates properly when a failure occurs.


1. Using at least one module that has hardware protection, create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs. You can use a module that has the trail passing through it (for example, SIM) or ending on it (for example, PIM).


3. Extract the protected (working) module.

Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports an alarm on the trail.

4. Verify that the trail works properly via the protection (standby) module.

The orange protection LED on the relevant TPM lights.

5. Reinsert the protected (working) module.

After 5 minutes (system default - can be changed), the traffic reverts back to the protected module. Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports no alarm on the trail.


Severity assignment test

This test, which is performed on one ADR10000 NE, determines the level of urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol.

When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.


1. Extract an NVM card from the MXC card.

The management station displays an NVM Card Out alarm of Major severity.

2. Reinsert the NVM card. The Card Out alarm on the management station clears.

3. Change the severity of the Card out alarm for the NVM card to Minor.

4. Extract the NVM card. The management station displays an NVM Card Out alarm of Minor severity.

5. Reinsert the NVM card. The Card Out alarm on the management station clears.

Transmission alarm handling tests

This test verifies that the ADR10000 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an alarm notification to the management system, and that the management system displays it properly.

This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.




3. Disconnect the Tx cable of the test equipment.

The management station reports a LOS alarm for the relevant PDH port.

4. Set the test equipment to send an AIS (AIS = on).

The management station reports an AIS alarm for the corresponding port.



5. Disconnect the Rx fiber of an optical port.

The management station reports a LOS (SPI-LOS) alarm for the corresponding port.

If ALS is off, the management station reports a far-end optical port MS-RDI or Line-RDI alarm.

If ALS is on, the management station reports a far-end optical port LOS alarm.

Maintenance actions tests

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the ADR10000 NEs using the management system.

This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.




3. Perform a near-end loopback at the other trail endpoint.

4. Using the management station, execute a forced AIS on the PDH port that connects to the test equipment.

The PDH test equipment detects an AIS alarm.

MXC redundancy test

This test verifies that the backup MXC operates properly and that the database is not lost when a failure occurs.




3. Select an NE that passes the trail, and extract the MXC on slot A

Neither the test equipment nor the management station detects a traffic


No. Test procedure Expected results (upper). alarm, but a Card Out alarm for the

MXC appears in the management. After several minutes, the NE disconnects from the management station (turns gray), and then reconnects to the management with the same database (switches to the redundant MXC). The Info windows of both MXCs display the correct status.

Data Network Commissioning Tests

The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in accordance with system specifications.

Throughput and latency tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before frames are lost.


1. Create two unprotected trails at any rate between two NEs in the network.

2. Connect the test equipment to both ports of one NE.

3. Connect a cross cable on both ports of the other NE.

4. Configure the test equipment for measurement of throughput and latency in accordance with RFC-2544.

5. Measure throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the results in the appropriate table.


NOTE:

Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths. For a single path, the latency will be 50% of the measured value.

The latency test is dependent on the throughput results. For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is 4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4 Mbps).

Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12 = 2.048 Mbps).

Table 7-5: Throughput and latency test results

LAN port & speed 64 bytes/ frame

128 bytes/ frame

256 bytes/ frame

512 bytes/ frame

1024 bytes/ frame

1280 bytes/ frame

1518 bytes/ frame

Throughput

Latency

Frame loss rate test

This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is overloaded.

Table 7-6: Frame loss rate test procedure


1. Create two unprotected trails at any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps or 1 Gbps) between two NEs.


3. Connect a cross cable on both ports of the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports).



4. Configure the test equipment for measurement of frame loss in accordance with RFC-2544. Set for 100%.

The frame loss rate in % is defined according to the following formula: [(Input fps) – (Output fps)] x 100/(Input fps) Where fps stands for frames per second. Example: At 100 Mbps with 5 VC-12s (10 Mbps), the Input fps is 148810. When the Output fps is 14881, the frame loss is 148810 – 14881 = 133929, which represents 90% loss.

Table 7-7: Frame loss rate test results

Frame size 64 bytes/ frame

128 bytes/ frame

256 bytes/ frame

512 bytes/ frame

1024 bytes/ frame

1280 bytes/ frame

1518 bytes/ frame

Frame rate (% MFR) 100%

System recovery and reset tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer overflow condition and from a power failure.





4. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate, and for any frame size.

5. Power off one of the NEs. Verify packet loss in the test equipment. 6. Turn on the NE and wait for 2

minutes. Verify that the errors in the test equipment have cleared.


Stability test

This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can function with no errors for a defined period of time.





4. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate, and for any frame size.

5. Run this test for 2 hours. Verify that no errors appear in the test equipment.

Alarm handling test

This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and to the optical interfaces.


1. Create two trails at any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps) between two NEs.



4. Disconnect the test equipment to create a signal loss to the data LAN port.

A 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm is generated (only if VLAN is created).

5. Disconnect the optical cable to create a signal loss to the optical interface.

An SPI LOS alarm on the optical interface is generated.


Optical Network Commissioning Tests

The optical network commissioning tests verify normal network operation. Perform these tests only after the entire network is complete.

Test setup and required test equipment

Optical network commissioning tests check the performance of transmission paths within the network. To perform these tests, use an optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, variable attenuator, and optical BER tester. Configure the BER tester to operate at the transponder transmission rate (for example, STM-16 when connected to a CTRP25).

The following figure shows the test setup for the optical commissioning tests.

Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup


Optical power measurement test

This test verifies that all optical cards/modules and all optical links are operating according to the optical power budget plan and ADR10000 specifications.


1. Using an optical power meter, measure the input and output optical levels of each optical component (card, module, and so on). Record the results of all the measurements (Excel file); these results provide the information needed to evaluate the optical budget of the network.

The measurement results are within the range of minimum and maximum levels specified for each type of optical component (see ADR System Specifications).

2. Using an optical spectrum analyzer, measure the following parameters for each link:

Spectrum of the composite line signal

Power per channel OSNR (Optical Signal to Noise

Ratio) Gain tilt

For this purpose, measure the optical signals at the input and output of each active and passive optical component (optical booster, preamplifier, OADM, MUX, DEMUX, supervisory channel interfaces, and so on).

The measured levels are within the range expected in accordance with the planned optical network power budget.


Equipment power-on test

This test verifies that the ADR10000 NEs continue operating normally after a power break, without operator involvement.


1. Select one of the optical paths in the network.

2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs).

3. Shut off the power to one of the non-gateway NEs within the relevant optical path.

An alarm appears in the test equipment and the management station. After approximately seven minutes, an "NE disconnected" alarm appears in the management current alarm list, and the NE icon turns gray (no communication).

4. Power on the NE and wait for it to perform initial download to all cards in the shelf.

Can take up to 20 minutes.

5. Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there are no alarms related to the relevant optic path in the test equipment or at the management station.

LOS detection test

This test verifies that the ADR10000 NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm notification to the management system for viewing.


1. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the optical modules.

A LOS alarm at the SPI level of this module post appears, together with other alarms caused by the disconnection.


Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the ADR10000 optical cards/modules is according to their technical specification.


1. Select one of the optical transmission paths in the network.

2. Connect the test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs).

3. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant path.

4. Set the attenuator to 0 dB.

5. Slowly increase the attenuation until the test equipment displays a burst of errors.

6. Connect an optical power meter to the first Rx point after the variable optical attenuator and measure the total power.

The measured optical power level is the input sensitivity of the card.

Path protection test

This test verifies that the protected traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.


1. Select one of the protected optical paths in the network.


3. Disconnect one of the optical fibers in the active path of the optical channel.

Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment and management station.

4. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the protection path.

5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The optical channel remains on the protection path (non-retrieve mode), and no alarm appears in the test equipment.


Maintenance action handling test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the ADR10000 NEs using the management system. This procedure tests a manual switch, forced switch, and switch lockout.


1. Select one of the protected optical transmission paths in the network.


3. From the management system, perform a manual switch.

Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment.

4. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the protection path.

5. Disconnect the line input of the nonactive TRP from its MUX.

6. From the management system, perform a manual switch.

Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment.

7. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the main path.

8. Disconnect the line input of the nonactive TRP from its DEMUX.

9. From the management station, perform a manual switch.

The optical channel switches to the protected path, and a LOS alarm appears in the test equipment.

10. From the management system, perform a switch lockout on the nonactive TRP.

11. Disconnect the line input of the active TRP from its DEMUX.

The optical channel does not switch to the protected path, and a LOS alarm appears in the test equipment.


BER and stability test

This test verifies that the optical channels in the ADR10000 optical network operate without errors (according to ITU-T standards). No. Test procedure Expected results

1. Select one of the protected optical paths in the network.


3. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the following table.

4. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management station.

You should achieve an error free rate of 1 x 10-12.

Table 7-8: BER and Stability Test time intervals

Rate STM-1 STM-4 STM-16

Time period 120 min 30 min 8 min


In this chapter: Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-1Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ............................................. 8-1Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 8-2Traffic Monitoring System .............................................................................. 8-7Onsite Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 8-12Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 8-21Replacing RAP Components ......................................................................... 8-28

Overview This chapter provides maintenance procedures for ADR10000 equipment.

Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials

For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only a Craft terminal and a multimeter are required. If you need to make measurements, it is recommended to use equipment of the same type and models used for commissioning tests (page 7-1). The tools and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be available during maintenance.

8 Maintenance


Preventive Maintenance The purpose of the preventive maintenance activities is to keep the ADR10000 hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.

Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the procedures used in your organization.

Table 8-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks

Item Inspection/Check Intervals* W M Q

1. Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check for correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper support to avoid stress. Avoid touching fibers during the inspection, except as required to correct problems.

X

2. Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals, grounding, and so on, and pay special attention to any signs of corrosion.

X

3. Check condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. Clean as necessary with approved cleaning agents.

X

4. Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, and so on) and their power sources.

X

5. Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by protective covers. Add covers as necessary.

X

6. Check that cards and modules are securely attached: all extractor handles must be in the storage position (parallel to the card edge), and all module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only manually).

X

7. Check for proper operation of the FCU300 (no abnormal noise and vibrations) in all NEs.

X

8. Check that the FCU300 is fully inserted in its chassis position and that its screws are tight.

X

9. Clean the FCU300 and inspect the air filters. Clean or replace the air filters if necessary.

X

10. Clean all areas around the shelf in the rack and the rack's front door (if applicable), using a vacuum cleaner.

X

11. Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources (main and backup) to the RAP are properly connected.

X

12. Check that the external alarm cables are properly connected to the RAP.

X

13. Check that there are no alarm indications on the cards and modules.

X


Item Inspection/Check Intervals* W M Q

14. Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer sounds when the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP panel is pressed. Note: The buzzer will not sound if the ACO is active.

X

15. Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F panel is pressed.

X

16. Perform a visual check of LED indications. X

17. Check the proper operation of the OW system (if applicable to the NE).

X

*Legend: W weekly M monthly Q quarterly

Air Filter Preventive Maintenance

Air particles trapped by the air filter increase the resistance to airflow, and can eventually decrease the airflow below the minimum required for proper cooling of internal components. The resulting increase in the internal temperature of the equipment reduces the equipment reliability and performance. Therefore, whenever an air filter is installed, it must periodically be cleaned or replaced with a clean filter.

It is accepted throughout the electronics equipment industry to recommend cleaning or replacing air filters approximately every 90 days. However, the cleaning intervals depend on the specific environmental conditions. In dusty environments more frequent cleaning is required. Note that foam filters, which are the type used in ADR platforms, efficiently trap particles without showing face loading of contaminants, and therefore visual inspection cannot be used to determine cleaning intervals.

CAUTION: Filter cleaning intervals must strictly be observed, as clogging by trapped particles can severely impair equipment reliability and performance.


Recommended Cleaning Methods

Use the following methods (listed in order of ascending efficiency) to clean air filters:

1. Vacuum clean: A few passes of a vacuum cleaner remove accumulated dust and dirt in seconds. Point the air nozzle in the direction of operating airflow (vacuum from intake side toward exhaust side).

2. Blow with compressed air: Point a compressed air nozzle in the opposite direction of the operating airflow (blow from the exhaust side toward the intake side).

NOTE: Oily residues and moisture reduce cleaning efficiency of the above methods; in such cases, clean the filter using method No. 4, or replace the filter.

3. Cold water rinse: Under normal service conditions, the foam media used in the filters require no oily adhesives. Therefore, collected dust and dirt can be washed away using a standard hose nozzle with plain water. Stand the filter until completely dry and free of moisture, and return to service.

4. Immersion in warm soapy water: Where stubborn airborne dirt is present, the filter may be dipped in a solution of warm water and mild detergent. Then simply rinse in clear water, stand until completely dry and free of moisture, and return to service.

The recommended method is No. 4, as it ensures thorough cleaning of all types of contaminants under any reasonable service conditions.


Cleaning the air filter

For the procedure steps, refer to the following figure.

Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter

NOTE: The air filter can be removed and reinstalled while the ADR10000 shelf is in operation.


To clean the air filter:

1. Release the two thumbnuts fastening the filter in the upmost position.

2. Lower the filter frame and pull the filter out.

3. Inspect the filter for damage. If any damage (for example, holes or torn material) is evident, replace the filter with a new one.

CAUTION: Replace the filter only with a filter of the original type. Failure to do so can impair equipment reliability and performance.

4. Clean the filter using the method selected by your organization.

5. Identify the filter's air intake side, indicated by the two coding tabs.

6. Insert the clean filter in the holding frame, lift the thumbnuts and fasten them in place.


Traffic Monitoring System

Principles of Operation

The ADR10000 incorporates a traffic monitoring system that enables rapid allocation of major problems in the traffic passing through its aggregate and I/O modules.

The ADR10000 monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing through the I/O modules installed in slots I1 to I16 of the modules cages.

The main components of the monitoring system interface are located on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F front panel. These components, except for the monitoring point and monitoring indicator, are common to all modules. In addition, the system has a monitoring point and monitoring indicators on the front panel of the modules. The PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B, and PIM345 have only one monitoring indicator used for all their channels. STM-1 modules do not have a monitoring point, and use the monitoring point on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F card.

Figure 8-2: ECU300/ECU300-F-F monitoring system interface

The system's common components on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F are as follows:

MODULE selector

CHANNEL selector

MODULE, 2-digit display

CHANNEL, 2-digit display

The ECU300/ECU300-F-F components that serve only STM-1 modules are:

STM-1 MON monitoring point


MON indicator

The monitoring system components on the monitored modules include:

MON monitoring point

MON indicators

Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module

The monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing through a module. To do so, test equipment is connected to the monitoring point of the corresponding module, and the module and port are selected by the system's selectors. As a result, the traffic is closed through the test equipment and the signal can be viewed, in an eye pattern, on the test equipment display.

Selecting a module

The MODULE selector chooses the monitored module slot number. The selected module is displayed on the 2-digit display to the right of the selector. Pressing the selector upward increments the slot number; pressing it downward decrements the slot number. The selection is cyclic. Possible selections are QA and QB for the aggregate cards (I/O cards), and I1 to I16 for the I/O modules. If the selected module is an STM-1, the MON indicator on the ECU300/ECU300-F lights.


Selecting a channel

The CHANNEL selector chooses the specific monitored channel (port) on the module selected. The selected channel is displayed on the 2-digit display to the left of the selector. Pressing the selector upward increments the channel number; pressing it downward decrements the channel number. The selection is cyclic. Possible selections are from 00 to the module's maximum number of channels. For example, in a PIM2_21 (which has 21 ports), the selection goes from 00 to 21. When the value 00 is selected, the system blocks the monitoring to the selected module.

In addition to the number of the selected channel shown on the display, a MON indicator lights near the selected port on the module. If an STM-1 module is selected, the MON indicator on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F lights in addition to the LED near the selected port on the module.

Stabilization time

The monitoring system has a stabilization time of approximately 1.5 seconds. This means that after a new value is selected with the MODULE or CHANNEL selectors, the display starts blinking for the stabilization time, and only after that the new selection is displayed.

Response to events

This section describes the response of the monitoring system to the following events:

Power-on

Cold restart

MXC300 switching to redundancy

Warm restart

ECU300/ECU300-F extraction/insertion

After power-on, the monitoring system displays 17 00. This is the default state, and indicates slot QA and channel 00. Channel 00 is defined in the system as idle state, and indicates that no channel was selected and that monitoring is disabled. To enable the monitoring results, a module and a channel must be selected.

The response of the system to MXC300 switching to redundancy is identical to the response to cold restart.

Warm restart does not affect the traffic or monitoring of any modules in the ADR10000.


After extracting/inserting the ECU300/ECU300-F, the monitoring display is reset to the default state 17 00, and the monitoring history stored in the ECU300/ECU300-F memory is lost.

Assigning modules to slots

To monitor a module installed in a specific slot, the management system must have previously assigned that module to the slot. If the module was not assigned, the CHANNEL display will indicate 00 and remain in this state, even if you attempt to change the selection.

If a module in a slot is replaced with a module of the same type, the display will not change and the system will read the monitoring result for the channel that was last selected. If a module has to be replaced with a module of a different type, the new module must be assigned to the slot. Then, a new MODULE and CHANNEL selection must be made.

Monitoring options

The system can monitor a number of channels in different modules simultaneously. This feature is useful when traffic passing through different modules in the ADR10000 has to be analyzed.

After monitoring channels of different modules, all selected channel numbers of these modules are saved in the ECU300/ECU300-F memory.

You can connect test equipment to various modules or connect test equipment with multiple inputs to simultaneously monitor the traffic passing through the channels in these modules.

Monitoring Signal Levels

The following table lists the normal signal levels at the monitoring points for the various modules.

Table 8-2: I/O modules monitoring data

Module type Monitoring point Number of channels (ports)

Signal rate and level

SIM1_4/O SIM1_4/OB

ECU300/ECU300-F-F front panel

4 155 Mbps, CMI

SIM1_4/E ECU300/ECU300-F-F front panel

4 155 Mbps, CMI

SIM1_8 ECU300/ECU300-F-F front panel

8 155 Mbps, CMI


Module type Monitoring point Number of channels (ports)

Signal rate and level

SIM4_2 Module front panel 2 622 Mbps, NRZ SIM4_4 Module front panel 4 622 Mbps, NRZ PIM2_21 Module front panel 21 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3 PIM2_63/B Module front panel 63 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3 PIM345_3 Module front panel 3 34 or 45 Mbps, HDB-3

Monitoring Modules Traffic

Monitoring the traffic of STM-1 and other modules operating at a different rate is similar, and differs only in the location of the monitoring point and LED indicators.

To monitor the traffic in a non-STM-1 module:

1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.

2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point.

3. Select the slot number of the monitored module using the MODULE selector.

4. Select the channel number of the monitored port using the CHANNEL selector.

5. Wait for the display to stabilize (stop blinking), and then verify that the required slot and channel were selected.

6. Verify that the MON indicator of the selected channel lights.

7. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring point.

To monitor the traffic in an STM-1 module:

1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.

2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point on the ECU300/ECU300-F card.

3. Perform Steps 3 to 5 in the previous section.

4. Verify that the MON indicator on the ECU300/ECU300-F card and the corresponding MON indicator on the STM-1 module light.

5. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring point.


Onsite Troubleshooting The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.

Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following conditions:

Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.

Alarm or malfunction detected on site by maintenance personnel, either as a result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available on the ADR10000 system components.

This chapter assumes familiarity with the ADR10000, with SDH, data, and CWDM equipment, and with the IONOS-NMS and EMS-ADR management stations. Refer to the respective user manuals for details on the various capabilities of the management stations, and for instructions on performing the desired activities.

The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite troubleshooting for various trouble categories, as well as for specific subsystems, for example, OADMs, Mux/DeMux subsystems, and so on. For each category, you will find a troubleshooting table that provides the instructions for identifying the trouble.

To use the troubleshooting table:

1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under “Symptoms”.

2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under “Corrective actions” in the order in which they appear until the trouble is corrected.


Troubleshooting Power Problems

Table 8-3: Troubleshooting power problems

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions

1 RAP POWER ON indicator is off.

Both main and backup power sources failed.

1. Check the site power distribution system.

2. Check the DC voltage at the main and backup power terminals of the RAP.

3. If the voltage is not within the correct range, check cable connections up to the DC power distribution panel, and make sure no fuses are blown.

4. Check the voltage supplied by the main and backup power sources.

5. Check the power connections to the RAP.

6. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if necessary.

Equipment problem. 1. Check the voltage at the MXC300 end of each power cable. Replace the cable or repair the RAP if there is no voltage present.

2. If after checking (as explained above) and reconnecting a cable to the equipment, the circuit breaker trips again, replace the corresponding MXC300 card.

3. If the problem occurs again after Step 2, remove all the cards and modules from the shelf and reinsert them one by one until you find the component causing the circuit breaker to trip. Replace that component

2 MXC300 ACTIVE indicator is off.

No input power to the corresponding unit.

1. Check the corresponding circuit breaker in the RAP; reset any tripped breaker.

2. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if necessary.

3. If the circuit breaker trips again, disconnect the cable protected by the corresponding circuit breaker from the equipment and check the voltage polarity.

4. Check the power cable condition and make sure that the cable is not damaged and does not cause short circuits.

5. Check proper cable connection at both ends.

3 MXC300 FAIL indicator lights.

Technical failure in the corresponding unit.

Replace the unit.


Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators

The management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of suspected components.

Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators. These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with the procedures outlined in the following tables.

NOTE: See description of indicator functions in the Product Line Reference Manual.

CAUTION: The following corrective actions are traffic-affecting.

Table 8-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules


1 Green ACT/AC indicator is off.

Defective indicator

Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F, and check that the indicator lights. If not, replace the card/module.

Defective card/module

1. Remove the card/module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the card or module in its slot.

2. If the ACT/AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion, replace the card/module.

2 Red FAIL/FL indicator does not turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting).

Defective card/module

1. Remove the card/module and wait a few minutes before reinserting it. Make sure the ACT/AC indicator turns on after the card/module is reinserted.

2. The FAIL/FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the card/module. Wait until the software download is complete and check that the FAIL/FL indicator turns off.

3. If the FAIL/FL indicator turns on again, replace the card/module.

3 Orange (traffic carrying) indicator is off when indicator is supported.

Card/module not configured to carry traffic

Check with the management station operator if the card/module has already been configured and provisioned; if not, ignore the state of the orange indicator.

CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so may damage the receiver irreparably.


Table 8-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins


1 Green transceiver state indicator is off.

The corresponding optical transmitter may have been turned off by the ALS function (see note below).

1. When available, press the laser-on pushbutton of the ECU300/ECU300-F to activate the corresponding laser.

2. If the problem persists, the laser automatically turns off again after a few seconds. Check that all the fibers are properly connected to the corresponding optical transceiver.

3. Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected after the transceiver is reinserted.

2 Transceiver state indicator lights in red.

Test equipment is connected to the monitoring connector of the corresponding plug-in.

1. For plug-in transceivers with monitoring connector: the test equipment is connected to the monitoring connector. This indication is provided for identification purposes, and does not necessarily indicate a malfunction.

Defective transceiver.

1. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver and remove it.

2. Reinstall the transceiver in its position, making sure to fully engage its connector to the mating card connector.

3. Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected after the transceiver is reinserted.

NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost. Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction, which turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network and generates a large number of alarms.

As a result, it may be difficult to identify the real cause of the problem, and you may need to use the management station log records to identify the port.


Table 8-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules


1 Green AC indicator is off.

Defective indicator

Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F and check that the indicator lights. If not, replace the card/module.

Defective module

1. Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the module in its slot.

2. If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion, replace the module.

2 Red FL indicator does not turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting).

Defective module

1. Remove the module and wait a few minutes before reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns on after the module is reinserted.

2. The FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the module. Wait until the software download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off.

3. If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.

Table 8-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux



Defective module

1. Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the module in its slot.


2 Red FL indicator does not turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting).

Defective module


2. The FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the component. Wait until the software download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off.



Table 8-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs



Defective module

1. Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the card in its slot.


2 Red FL indicator on the module does not turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting).

Defective module


2. The FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the module. Wait until the software download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off.


3 Orange (traffic carrying) indicator on module is off.

Module not configured to carry traffic

Check with the management station operator whether the module has already been configured and provisioned; if not, ignore the state of the orange indicator.

4 Green (link state) indicator of an Ethernet optical port is off.

Problem related to port

1. Check port configuration.

2. Check connections to LAN.

3. Make sure at least one LAN station is active.

4. Replace optical transceiver of port.

5 Link state indicator of an 10/100BaseT Ethernet port is off.

Problem related to port

1. Check port configuration.

2. Check connections to LAN.

3. Make sure at least one LAN station is active.


Troubleshooting the Timing Subsystem

Table 8-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem


1 Switching to standby TMU

Technical failure Force switching of traffic to the other MXC300, and then replace the MXC300 card with the defective TMU.

Missing T3/BITS IN external reference signal

1. Check the equipment providing the external reference signal and make sure it operates normally.

2. Check the cable connected to the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F-F connector. Make sure both its ends are properly connected to the mating connector.

3. Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if in doubt.

4. Replace the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F-F.

Missing T4/BITS OUT external reference signal

1. Check the cable connected to the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F-F connector. Make sure both its ends are properly connected to the mating connector.

2. Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if in doubt.

3. Replace the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F-F.

4. Force switching of traffic to the other MXC300, and then replace the MXC300 with the defective TMU.

Loss of reference clock source provided by a tributary

Troubleshoot the corresponding module and replace it if found faulty.


Troubleshooting Transmission and Traffic Alarms

Before any other troubleshooting activity, check the management station log to check if a specific component has been reported as faulty and replace it.

CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so may damage the receiver irreparably.

Table 8-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms


1 Alarm related to a client signal

External problem 1. Check the proper operation of the equipment providing the tributary signal and its connections to the ADR10000 I/O port.

2. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a reference for the required signal levels, and make measurements of current levels at all the relevant monitoring points. Compare the reference levels with the measured values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed component (for example, low transmit level, excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).

2 Alarm related to a line signal

External problem 1. Check the proper operation of the equipment providing the line signal and its connections to the ADR10000 port.

2. Use the network and site documentation to identify the path associated with the reported alarm and all related optical and/or electrical components. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a reference for the required signal levels, and make measurements of current levels at all the relevant monitoring points through the management.

3. Compare the reference levels with the measured values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed component (for example, low transmit level, excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).


Troubleshooting Management Communication

When the management station cannot manage an ADR10000 shelf, use the following table to identify the cause of the problem.

NOTE: Whenever you detect problems during commissioning tests and when troubleshooting a new installation, do not overlook the possibility of configuration and/or provisioning errors. Under such circumstances, always start the troubleshooting procedures by reviewing all equipment configurations and provisioning parameters against the original network design, and correct as necessary.

Table 8-11: Troubleshooting management communication


1 Problems in management traffic path

Defective card/module in management traffic path

1. Check for fault indications on the cards processing the management communication (see General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules).

2. Force switching to the protection path and reset each component. Use the results of the BIT test to identify the faulty component.

Problem in transmission path

1. Use the network and site documentation to identify the path of the management communication to the corresponding ADR shelf and all the related optical components.

2. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a reference for the required signal levels, and make measurements of current levels at all the relevant monitoring points through the management.

3. Compare the reference levels with the measured values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed component (for example, low transmit level, excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).

Other problems Replace suspected components in the following sequence:

1. Hubs and Ethernet cables used for management traffic

2. ECU300/ECU300-F

3. MXC300


Replacing Cards and Modules

Safety and Workmanship

Refer to Before You Start/Safety Guidelines (page 1-1) for safety and workmanship instructions.

CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED

ADR10000 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection against ESD. Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install them.

Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection to internal connectors.

Before you start:

When inserting cards and modules, make sure to align the card or module carefully with the platform guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the card/module and repeat the process.

Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent cards/modules.

Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and modules.

Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent connector pins.


Before replacing any card, module, NVM, or optical transceiver:

1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged during shipment.

2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection packaging and inspect visually to detect damage during shipment. Report any problems.

3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the component to be replaced.

After replacing a component:

1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.

2. Attach a report to the package explaining the reason for the replacement, and identify the network site, physical location, platform, and time of replacement.

Replacing MXC300 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the MXC300.

CAUTION:

Do not extract/insert an MXC300 while the DC cables are connected to it.

If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs blink simultaneously, the MXC300 is not mounted correctly or not all four screws are properly locked.

Before attempting to remove the card, monitor its NVM (yellow) indicator; remove the card only after this indicator has been off for at least 2 minutes.


To replace the MXC300:

1. Initiate a forced switching to the other MXC300.

2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC300 to be replaced turns off and remains off for at least 2 minutes, and then remove the NVM card as described in Replacing the NVM on MXC300 cards. It is recommended to wait until the yellow indicator of the other MXC300 card also turns off.

CAUTION: When replacing any MXC300 card, the upper left screw operates a microswitch. When this screw is open, it indicates to the ADR10000 platform that the MXC300 is not installed. This screw must be opened first when replacing an MXC300 card.

3. Open the MXC300 upper left screw first, then the upper right screw, and then the two lower screws.

4. Hold both extractor handles and pull them simultaneously outward until the card is released from the backplane.

5. Keep holding the handles, and gently pull the card out of the shelf.

6. If necessary, transfer the NVM from the replaced MXC300 card to its replacement (see Replacing the NVM on MXC300 cards).

7. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card guides.

8. Push the card’s front panel with both hands until the extractor handles attach to the panel.

9. Push the card in by holding both handles and pushing them simultaneously inward, until the card mates the chassis connectors and is locked in place. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.

10. Close the card’s upper left screws first, then the upper right screw, and then the two lower screws.

NOTE: Make sure that all four screws in the MXC300 are properly tightened. Failing to do so may result in improper operation of the shelf.

If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs blink simultaneously, the MXC is not mounted correctly or not all four screws are properly locked.


Replacing the NVM on MXC300 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the NVM.

CAUTION: To prevent disruption of data stored on the NVM, make sure you do not open the NVM cover while the MXC300 accesses the NVM. Before attempting to remove the NVM, monitor the NVM (yellow) indicator; open the NVM cover only after the NVM indicator on the MXC300 has been off for at least 2 minutes.

To replace the NVM:

1. Force switch to the other MXC300.

2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC300 on which the NVM is to be replaced turns off, and remains off for at least 2 minutes.

3. Open the two captive screws fastening the NVM cover to the MXC300.

4. Press the NVM release pushbutton, using the NVM cover edge as an extractor tool.

5. Carefully extract the NVM from the MXC300.

6. Orient the replacement NVM in the correct position and push it straight into its socket.

7. Replace the NVM's cover, and fasten it to the MXC300 with its two captive screws.

At this stage, you may either wait for the automatic updating of the database stored on the new NVM (this may take up to one hour), or immediately force a switching to the MXC300 on which the NVM has been replaced.


Replacing ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ ECU300-F-F Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F.

CAUTION: Replace the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F card as rapidly as possible. While the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F card is out, management, debugging, T3/T4 synchronization, and other tasks supported by this card are not possible.

Before attempting to remove the card, monitor the NVM (yellow) and TMU (orange) indicators of the MXC300 installed in the shelf; remove the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F only after the MXC300 indicators have been off for at least 2 minutes.

To replace the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F:

1. Mark each cable connected to the card for identification purposes.

2. Disconnect the cables connected to the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F.

3. Open the two captive screws fastening the card to the shelf.

4. Remove the card to be replaced by pulling its handle.

5. Insert the rear end of the replacement card in the corresponding card guides.

6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.

7. Fasten the card to the shelf by its two captive screws.

8. Reconnect the cables disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement card.


Replacing I/O Modules

The following procedure is applicable to all I/O modules.

Before you start:

For modules with electrical interfaces that use electrical interface protection via TPMs, first force a switch to the protection module (IOP) before replacing the module.

To replace I/O modules:

1. Mark each cable and fiber connected to the module for identification purposes.

2. Disconnect any cables or fibers connected to the module to be replaced.

3. Open the captive screws fastening the module to the shelf.

4. Remove the module to be replaced by pulling its handle.

5. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding module guides.

6. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.

7. Fasten the module to the shelf by its captive screws.

8. Reconnect any cables or fibers disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement module.

Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers

SAGEMCOM's Network Solutions Division supplies field-replaceable SFP/XFP transceivers. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the safety precautions described in Laser Device Operating Precautions during the replacement.

To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver:

1. Mark each fiber connected to the transceiver for identification purposes.

2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced.

3. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver.

4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.


5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before the transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.

Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module

6. Reconnect the fibers disconnected in Step 3.

Replacing the FCU300

The FCU300 can be replaced without disconnecting the power from the ADR10000 shelf.

CAUTION: To prevent the shelf overheating, complete the replacement within 2 to 3 minutes.

To replace the FCU300:

1. Prepare the replacement FCU300 so you can install it immediately after removing the old FCU300. In particular, carefully inspect the interior of the FCU300 to ensure that no foreign matter, for example, packaging chips, is present inside the unit.

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the FCU300 to the shelf.

3. Carefully remove the FCU300 to be replaced by slowly pulling it out of the shelf. Be aware that the internal fans may still be rotating.

4. Insert the replacement FCU300 in the corresponding shelf guides, and push it carefully in until the FCU300 fully engages the mating internal connector of the ADR10000 shelf. Make sure that the FCU300 front panel is flush with the shelf frame front edges. As the FCU300 is plugged into its mating connector, the green ACTIVE indicator on its panel should turn on.


5. Fasten the FCU300 to the shelf by its two captive screws.

Replacing RAP Components This section describes how to replace RAP components identified as faulty via the troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter.

Replacing xRAP-100 Circuit Breakers

xRAP-100 circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot swapping).

To replace the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:

1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).

2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of its socket.

3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced circuit breaker.

WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with a fuse of the same type and rating.


4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the corresponding xRAP-100 power terminal board, as shown in the following figure.

5. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.


Figure 8-5: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers

Replacing xRAP-D Circuit Breakers

xRAP-D circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot swapping).

To replace the xRAP-D circuit breakers:

1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).

2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of its socket.

3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced circuit breaker.

WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and rating.


4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the corresponding xRAP-D power terminal board, as shown in the following figures.


5. Reinstall the xRAP-D front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.

Figure 8-6: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A-1

In this appendix: Overview ........................................................................................................ A-1ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors............................................................ A-2MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors........................................................... A-9PIM2_21 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-10PIM2_42 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-13PIM2_63/B Connection Data ....................................................................... A-19PIM2_63S Connection Data......................................................................... A-23EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors .............................................................. A-31xRAP-100 Connectors.................................................................................. A-32RAP-4B Connectors ..................................................................................... A-37xRAP-D Connectors ..................................................................................... A-42

Overview This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in ADR shelves and associated ancillary equipment supplied by SAGEMCOM. .

Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division technical support personnel and/or for future expansion, and therefore no user equipment may be connected to them.

A Connector Pin Assignments


ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors

ALARMS Connector

The ALARMS connector is a 36-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines:

Five external alarm input lines referenced to an internal power supply common line (the power supply’s common line is floating relative to the chassis ground). The alarm input lines are monitored by the ADR10000 management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode of an optocoupler.

Three external alarm outputs/inputs. Each output is provided by three relay dry contacts. These lines can be configured as additional alarm inputs by the system’s management.

Four severity alarm outputs and a buzzer control line. Each output is provided by three relay dry contacts. The buzzer control line is provided by two dry contacts.

Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS connector.

Figure A-1: ALARMS connector pin identification

The ALARMS connector can be connected in several configurations to the customer’s alarm collecting facility. It can be connected directly to the customer’s distribution frame or via xRAP or xRAP-100 rack alarm panels to the customer’s facility. SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division offers appropriate cables for each of the configurations. These cables are described in the sections that follow.


Table A-1: ALARMS connector pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction Pin Designation Function Direction

1 COMMON_F Floating power supply common

Input 19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC

Output

2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire

Input 20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO

Output

3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – wire

Input 21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common

Output


Input 22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC

Output


Input 23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common

Output


Input 24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO

Output


Input 25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC

Output


Input 26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO

Output


Input 27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common

Output


Input 28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC

Output


Input 29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common

Output

12 ALM_O1NO/ IN6

Alarm output 1 NO/input 6, – wire

Output/ Input

30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO

Output

13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 common/ input 6, + wire

Output/ Input

31 ALM_O3NO/ IN8

Alarm output 3 common/ input 8, – wire

Output/ Input

14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC

Output 32 ALM_O3/IP8 Alarm output 3 common/ input 8, + wire

Output/ Input

15 ALM_O2NO/ IN7


Output/ Input


Output

16 ALM_O2/IP7 Alarm output 2 common/ input 7, + wire

Output/ Input

34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm sense 2

Input


Pin Designation Function Direction Pin Designation Function Direction


Output 35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm activation line

Input

18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common

Input 36 EXTA_SN1 External alarm sense 1

Input

NOTE: Alarm outputs of ALM_01NO/IN6, ALM_O1/IP6, ALM_O2NO/IN7, ALM_O2/IP7, ALM_O3NO/IN8, and ALM_O3/IP8 can be configured as alarm inputs by system management.

Alarms Client Cable

This cable provides a direct connection between the ADR10000 and the customer’s distribution frame. The cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on one end which connects to the ALARMS connector, and open wires for connecting to the customer’s facility on the other end. The following table lists the pin assignment in the SCSI connector, and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin for the connection between the ADR10000 ALARMS connector and a distribution frame.

Table A-2: ALARMS client cable wiring

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


Input Brown

2 — Not connected — —

3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – wire Input Brown/gray-ring


5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, – wire Input Red


7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, – wire Input Red/gray-ring


9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, – wire Input Orange


11 ALM_IN5 Alarm input 5, – wire Input Orange/gray-ring

12 ALM_O1NO/ IN6

Alarm output 1 NO/input 6,– wire

Output/Input Yellow

13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 common/input 6, + wire

Output/ Input

Yellow/gray-ring

14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC Output Green

15 ALM_O2NO/ IN7


Output/ Input

Green/gray-ring




Output/ Input

Blue

17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output 2 NC Output Blue/gray-ring

18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input Violet

19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC Input White

20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO Input White/gray-ring

21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common Pink

22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC Input Pink/gray-ring

23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input Brown/white-ring

24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO Input Red/white-ring

25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC — Orange/white-ring

26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO Input Yellow/white-ring

27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input Green/white-ring

28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC Input Blue/white-ring

29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common — Violet/white-ring

30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO — Light gray/ white-ring

31 ALM_O3NO/ IN8

Alarm output 3 common/input 8,– wire

— Red/brown-ring


Input Yellow/brown-ring

33 ALM_O3NC Alarm output 3 NC Input Orange/brown-ring

34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm sense 2 Input

35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm activation line Input Violet/gray-ring

36 EXTA_SN1 External alarm sense 1 Input

xRAP-100 alarms cable

This cable connects the ADR10000 to the xRAP-100. The cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on both ends; one connects to the ADR10000 ALARMS connector, and the other to the xRAP-100 ALARMS connector. The following table lists the xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring.

Table A-3: xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring

ADR10000 side SCSI connector

Name Function xRAP-100 side SCSI connector


1

2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire 2

3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – wire 3



ADR10000 side SCSI connector

Name Function xRAP-100 side SCSI connector








12 ALM_O1NO/IN6 Alarm output 1 NO/input 6, – wire

12


13

14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC 14

15 ALM_O2NO/IN7 Alarm output 2 NO/input 7, – wire

15


16


18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common 18

19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC 19

20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO 20

21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common 21

22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC 22

23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common 23

24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO 24

25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC 25

26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO 26

27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common 27

28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC 28

29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common 29

30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO 30

31 ALM_O3NO/IN8 Alarm output 3 common/input 8, – wire

31


32


34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm sense 2 34

35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm activation line

35

36 EXTA_SN1 External alarm sense 1 36


F-CHANNEL Connector

The F-CHANNEL connector is a 9-pin D-type male connector that provides a serial RS-232 communication channel supporting SLIP. This connector is intended for connection to a Craft terminal. The connection is made to one of the serial RS-232 ports of the PC serving as a Craft terminal, using a crossed cable.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment, together with the corresponding pin in the Craft terminal serial RS-232 port (assuming that this port uses a 9-pin connector).

Figure A-2: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification

Table A-4: F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Craft terminal serial port pin

1 — Not connected — Not connected

2 COM-F-RX F-channel receive Input Pin 3 (transmit output)

3 COM-F-TX F-channel transmit Output Pin 2 (receive input)

4 — Not connected — Not connected

5 GND Ground — Pin 5 (ground)

6, 7, 8, 9

— Not connected — Not connected

T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors

The T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors are 9-pin D-type male connectors, each including two groups of lines:

Clock input (T3 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)

Clock output (T4 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)

The MAIN connector serves the main TMU, and the PROTECT connector serves the standby (protection) TMU. They are connected to the site timing reference distribution subsystem.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector, and the table lists their pin assignment.

Figure A-3: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification


Table A-5: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction

1 SHIELD Shield - 2 CK_2M_MIL Clock input, low Input 3 SHIELD Shield - 4 CK_2M_MOL Clock output, low Output 5 — Not connected - 6 CK_2M_MIH Clock input, high Input 7 SHIELD Shield - 8 CK_2M_MOH Clock output, high Output 9 — Not connected -

ETHERNET Connectors

The two ETHERNET connectors located on the ECU300/ECU300-F panel, designated MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT, are 8-pin RJ-45 connectors that provide two Ethernet 10BaseT management interfaces (one for each MXC300 card installed in the ADR10000 shelf).

At any time, only the interface connected to the MXC300 serving as the current main card is active; the interface connected to the MXC300 serving as the protection card is in standby to provide protection for the out-of-band management traffic.

Each ETHERNET connector is wired as a station port intended for direct connection through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.

Figure A-4: ETHERNET connectors pin identification


Table A-6: ETHERNET connectors pin assignment

Designation Function Direction

TX+ Transmit, + wire Output TX– Transmit, – wire Output RX+ Receive, + wire Input N/C Not connected RX– Receive, – wire Input FGND Frame ground N/C Not connected

MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors

The DC input power connector, designated POWER, is a 5-pin D-type male connector located on the MXC300 panel. The following figure identifies the functions of the POWER connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure A-5: POWER input power connector pin functions


PIM2_21 Connection Data The PIM2_21 provides 21 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has two 50-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the E1 receive signals and the lower connector serves the E1 transmit signals.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-6: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification

Table A-7: PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment


1 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Brown

2 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Red

3 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Orange

4 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Yellow

5 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Green

6 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Blue

7 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Violet

8 GND Shield — Brown/green-ring

9 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input White

10 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Pink

11 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Brown/white-ring

12 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Orange/white-ring

13 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Green/white-ring

14 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Violet/white-ring

15 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Red/brown-ring



16 GND Shield — Light-gray/green-ring

17 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Orange/brown-ring

18 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Blue/brown-ring

19 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light-gray/brown-ring

20 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Brown/red-ring

21 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input Yellow/red-ring

22 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Blue/red-ring

23 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input White/red-ring

24 GND Shield — Yellow/green-ring


26 GND Shield — Orange/green-ring

27 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Brown/gray-ring

28 RRING2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input Red/gray-ring

29 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Orange/gray-ring

30 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Yellow/gray-ring

31 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Green/gray-ring

32 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Blue/gray-ring

33 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Violet/gray-ring

34 GND Shield — Violet/green-ring

35 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input White/gray-ring

36 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Pink/gray-ring

37 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Red/white-ring

38 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Yellow/white-ring

39 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Blue/white-ring

40 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light-gray/white-ring

41 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input Yellow/brown-ring

42 GND Shield — Blue/green-ring

43 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Green/brown-ring

44 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Violet/brown-ring

45 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Pink/brown-ring

46 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light-gray/red-ring

47 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Green/red-ring

48 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Violet/red-ring

49 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Pink/red-ring

50 GND Shield — Pink/green-ring


Table A-8: PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment


1 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Brown/yellow-ring

2 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Orange/yellow-ring

3 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Blue/yellow-ring

4 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Light-gray/ yellow-ring

5 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Brown/blue-ring

6 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Orange/blue-ring

7 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Green/blue-ring

8 GND Shield — Pink/orange-ring

9 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Light-gray/blue-ring

10 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Brown/orange-ring

11 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Yellow/orange-ring

12 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Blue/orange-ring

13 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Light-gray/ orange-ring

14 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output Brown/violet-ring

15 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Orange/violet-ring

16 GND Shield — Pink/blue-ring

17 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Green/violet-ring

18 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Light-gray/ violet-ring

19 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output Brown/pink-ring

20 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Orange/pink-ring

21 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Green/pink-ring

22 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Light-gray/pink-ring

23 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output Pink/violet-ring

24 GND Shield — Pink/white-ring


26 GND Shield — White/brown-ring

27 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Red/yellow-ring

28 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Green/yellow-ring

29 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Violet/yellow-ring

30 TRING4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White/yellow-ring

31 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Red/blue-ring

32 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Yellow/blue-ring

33 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Violet/blue-ring

34 GND Shield — Black

35 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output White/blue-ring

36 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Red/orange-ring



37 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Green/orange-ring

38 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Violet/orange-ring

39 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output White/orange-ring

40 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Red/violet-ring

41 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Yellow/violet-ring

42 GND Shield — Black/white-ring

43 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Blue/violet-ring

44 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output White/violet-ring

45 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Red/pink-ring

46 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Yellow/pink-ring

47 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Blue/pink-ring

48 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output White/pink-ring

49 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Pink/yellow-ring

50 GND Shield — Black/yellow

PIM2_42 Connection Data The PIM2_42 provides 42 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has two 100-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the first 21 E1s (#1 to #21) receive and transmit signals, and the lower connector serves the second 21 E1s (#22 to #42) receive and transmit signals.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-7: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification


Table A-9: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21) pin assignment


1 CGND Shield — Brown/green-ring

2 CGND Shield — Light Gray/green-ring





















23 CGND Shield — Violet/green-ring

24 CGND Shield — Blue/green-ring

25 CGND Shield — Pink/orange-ring

26 CGND Shield — Pink/blue-ring







33 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Light gray/yellow-ring










41 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Light gray/blue-ring








49 CGND Shield — Pink/white-ring

50 CGND Shield — White/brown-ring

51 CGND Shield — Yellow/green-ring

52 CGND Shield — Orange/green-ring






58 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light gray/white-ring







65 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light gray/brown-ring



68 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light gray/red-ring







75 CGND Shield — Pink/green-ring

76 CGND Shield — White/green-ring

77 CGND Shield — Black

78 CGND Shield — Black/white-ring



79 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Light gray/orange-ring








87 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Light gray/violet-ring








95 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Light gray/pink-ring




99 CGND Shield — Black/yellow-ring

100 CGND Shield — Black/pink-ring

Table A-10: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42) pin assignment


1 CGND Shield — Brown/green-ring

2 CGND Shield — Light Gray/green-ring























23 CGND Shield — Violet/green-ring

24 CGND Shield — Blue/green-ring

25 CGND Shield — Pink/orange-ring

26 CGND Shield — Pink/blue-ring







33 TTIP25 Transmit, tributary 25, wire A Output Light gray/yellow-ring








41 TTIP29 Transmit, tributary 29, wire A Output Light gray/blue-ring








49 CGND Shield — Pink/white-ring

50 CGND Shield — White/brown-ring

51 CGND Shield — Yellow/green-ring

52 CGND Shield — Orange/green-ring








58 RRING34 Receive, tributary 34, wire B Input Light gray/white-ring







65 RTIP38 Receive, tributary 38, wire A Input Light gray/brown-ring



68 RRING39 Receive, tributary 39, wire B Input Light gray/red-ring



71 RTIP41 Receive, tributary 41 wire A Input Blue/red-ring




75 CGND Shield — Pink/green-ring

76 CGND Shield — White/green-ring

77 CGND Shield — Black

78 CGND Shield — Black/white-ring

79 TTIP33 Transmit, tributary 33, wire A Output Light gray/orange-ring








87 TTIP37 Transmit, tributary 37, wire A Output Light gray/violet-ring










95 TTIP41 Transmit, tributary 41, wire A Output Light gray/pink-ring




99 CGND Shield — Black/yellow-ring

100 CGND Shield — Black/pink-ring

PIM2_63/B Connection Data The PIM2_63/B provides 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has three pairs of 50-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector pair supports 21 E1 interfaces. The upper connector in each pair serves the E1 receive signals and the lower, the E1 transmit signals. The tributaries and type of signal (IN for receive, OUT for transmit) supported by each connector are marked near the connector: IN 1-21, OUT 1-21, IN 22-42, OUT 22-42, IN 43-63, and OUT 43-63.

The following figure identifies the connector pins in each pair as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector pair (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame. The tributary numbers appearing in these tables are given for the IN 1-21 and OUT 1-21 connectors. To obtain the correct tributary numbers for the other connectors, interpret the numbers as representing the number of the tributary in its group (for example, in connectors IN 22-42 and OUT 22-42, 7 represents E1 tributary 28; in connectors IN 43-63 and OUT 43-63, 12 represents E1 tributary 57).

Figure A-8: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification


Table A-11: PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment









8 GND Shield — Brown/green-ring








16 GND Shield — Light-gray/green-ring



19 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light-gray/ brown-ring





24 GND Shield — Yellow/green-ring


26 GND Shield — Orange/green-ring








34 GND Shield — Violet/green-ring








40 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light-gray/white-ring


42 GND Shield — Blue/green-ring




46 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light-gray/ red-ring




50 GND Shield — Pink/green-ring

Table A-12: PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment





4 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Light-gray/ yellow-ring




8 GND Shield — Pink/orange-ring

9 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Light-gray/ blue-ring




13 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Light-gray/ orange-ring


15 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Orange/ violet-ring

16 GND Shield — Pink/blue-ring


18 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Light-gray/ violet-ring






22 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Light-gray/ pink-ring


24 GND Shield — Pink/white-ring


26 GND Shield — White/brown-ring








34 GND Shield — Black








42 GND Shield — Black/white-ring








50 GND Shield — Black/yellow


PIM2_63S Connection Data The PIM2_63S provides 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector. The connector has two parts, each with 136 pins; the upper part serves the 63 E1 transmit signals, and the lower part the 63 E1 receive signals.

SAGEMCOM offers a special cable for connecting to the PIM2_63S. For a description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S (page 6-7). The cable end, connecting to the PIM2_63S terminates with a double 136-pin VHDCI male connector. The connector parts are designated as P1 for the transmit lines and P3 for the receive lines.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cable offered by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame. The cable marking in the heading of each table refers to the 26AWG cable connected to the connectors as designated in the cable description.

Figure A-9: PIM2_63S connector pin identification

Table A-13: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines


Cable a (Red dots on jacket)

1 CGND Shield —

2 CGND Shield —

3 TXD_P1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Brown

4 TXD_N1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Brown/Gray

5 TXD_P2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Red

6 TXD_N2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Red/Gray

7 TXD_P3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Orange

8 TXD_N3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Orange/Gray

9 TXD_P4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Yellow

10 TXD_N4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output Yellow/Gray

11 TXD_P5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Green

12 TXD_N5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Green/Gray



13 TXD_P6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Blue

14 TXD_N6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Blue/Gray

15 TXD_P7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Purple

16 TXD_N7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Purple/Gray

17 TXD_P8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output White

18 TXD_N8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output White/Gray

19 TXD_P9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Pink

20 TXD_N9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Pink/Gray

21 TXD_P10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Brown/White

22 TXD_N10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Red/White

23 TXD_P11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Orange/White

24 TXD_N11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Yellow/White

25 TXD_P12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Green/White

26 TXD_N12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output Blue/White

27 TXD_P13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output Purple/White

28 TXD_N13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Light-Gray/White

29 TXD_P14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Red/Brown

30 TXD_N14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Yellow/Brown

31 TXD_P15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Orange/Brown

32 TXD_N15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Green/Brown

33 TXD_P16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Blue/Brown

34 TXD_N16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output Purple/Brown

35 -- N/C -- --

36 -- N/C -- --

37 TXD_P17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output Light-Gray/Brown

38 TXD_N17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Pink/Brown

39 TXD_P18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Brown/Red

40 TXD_N18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Light-Gray/Red

41 TXD_P19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Yellow/Red

42 TXD_N19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Green/Red

43 TXD_P20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Blue/Red

44 TXD_N20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output Purple/Red

45 TXD_P21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output White/Red

46 TXD_N21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Pink/Red

Table A-14: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines


Cable b (Red dots on jacket)

91 RXD_N21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input Brown/Yellow

92 RXD_P21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Red/Yellow

93 RXD_N20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Orange/Yellow

94 RXD_P20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Green/Yellow

95 RXD_N19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input Blue/Yellow



96 RXD_P19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Purple/Yellow

97 RXD_N18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Light-Gray/Yellow

98 RXD_P18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input White/Yellow

99 RXD_N17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Brown/Blue

100 RXD_P17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Red/Blue

101 -- N/C -- --

102 -- N/C -- --

103 RXD_N16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Orange/Blue

104 RXD_P16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Yellow/Blue

105 RXD_N15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Green/Blue

106 RXD_P15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Purple/Blue

107 RXD_N14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Light-Gray/Blue

108 RXD_P14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input White/Blue

109 RXD_N13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Brown/Orange

110 RXD_P13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Red/Orange

111 RXD_N12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Yellow/Orange

112 RXD_P12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Green/Orange

113 RXD_N11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Blue/Orange

114 RXD_P11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Purple/Orange

115 RXD_N10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Light-Gray/Orange

116 RXD_P10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input White/Orange

117 RXD_N9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Brown/Purple

118 RXD_P9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Red/Purple

119 RXD_N8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input Orange/Purple

120 RXD_P8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input Yellow/Purple

121 RXD_N7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Green/Purple

122 RXD_P7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Blue/Purple

123 RXD_N6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Light-Gray/Purple

124 RXD_P6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input White/Purple

125 RXD_N5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Brown/Pink

126 RXD_P5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Red/Pink

127 RXD_N4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Orange/Pink

128 RXD_P4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Yellow/Pink

129 RXD_N3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Green/Pink

130 RXD_P3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Blue/Pink

131 RXD_N2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Light-Gray/Pink

132 RXD_P2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input White/Pink

133 RXD_N1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Pink/Purple

134 RXD_P1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Pink/Yellow

135 -- N/C -- --

136 -- N/C -- --




Cable c (Blue dots on jacket)


48 TXD_N22 Transmit, tributary22, wire B Output Brown/Gray



















67 -- N/C -- --

68 -- N/C -- --

69 -- N/C -- --

70 -- N/C -- --



























Cable d (Blue dots on jacket)























67 -- N/C -- --

68 -- N/C -- --

69 -- N/C -- --

70 -- N/C -- --








78 RXD_P28 Receive, tributary 28, wire B Input Blue/Purple

















Cable e (Yellow dots on jacket)


94 TXD_N43 Transmit, tributary 43, wire B Output Brown/Gray











































135 -- N/C -- --

136 -- N/C -- --



Cable f (Yellow dots on jacket)

1 -- N/C -- --

2 -- N/C -- --
































32 RXD_P49 Receive, tributary 49 wire B Input Blue/Purple













135 -- N/C -- --

136 -- N/C -- --


EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors EISMB_804 and DIOM_04 are GbE/Fast Ethernet modules that provide electrical 10/100/1000BaseT ports. DIOM_08 is a Fast Ethernet module that provides 10/100BaseT ports. MCSM in an MPLS Core Switch module that provides 10/100BaseT ports. All these modules use 8-pin RJ-45 connectors for the electrical ports.

The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The first table lists the pin out for a 10/100BaseT interface and the second for a 1000BaseT interface.

Figure A-10: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification

Table A-19: 10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction

1 TD+ Transmit, + wire Output 2 TD– Transmit, – wire Output 3 RD+ Receive, + wire Input 6 RD– Receive, – wire Input

Table A-20: 1000BaseT connector pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction

1 TR1P Transmit/Receive, pair 1, + wire I/O 2 TR1N Transmit/Receive, pair 1, – wire I/O 3 TR2P Transmit/Receive, pair 2, + wire I/O

4 TR2N Transmit/Receive, pair 2 – wire I/O

5 TR3P Transmit/Receive, pair 3 + wire I/O 6 TR3N Transmit/Receive, pair 3 – wire I/O 7 TR4P Transmit/Receive, pair 4 + wire I/O 8 TR4N Transmit/Receive, pair 4 – wire I/O


xRAP-100 Connectors

Shelf DC Input Power Connectors

The shelf DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 are 3-pin D-type male connectors. The Shelf 4 connector is a 5-pin D-type male connector that can be connected to regular or high-power ADR shelves or to BG shelves. The following figure identifies the functions of the shelf DC input connectors pins, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure A-11: DC input power connectors pin functions

SHELF ALARM Connectors

The four ALARMS connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector can be connected to the ALARMS connector of an ADR platform or to a BG platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen when looking into the connector).

Figure A-12: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin identification

The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.

Table A-21: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment


1 N/C -- -- 2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input 3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, - wire Input 4 ALM_IP2 Alarm input 2, + wire Input



5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, - wire Input 6 ALM_IP3 Alarm input 3, + wire Input 7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, - wire Input 8 ALM_IP4 Alarm input 4, + wire Input 9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, - wire Input 10 N/C -- -- 11 N/C -- -- 12 GND Ground -- 13 ALM_O1 Alarm output 1 common Output 14 N/C -- -- 15 GND Ground -- 16 ALM_O2 Alarm output 2 common Output 17 N/C -- -- 18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input 19 N/C -- -- 20 GND Ground -- 21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common -- 22 N/C -- -- 23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input 24 GND Ground -- 25 N/C -- -- 26 GND Ground -- 27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input 28 N/C -- -- 29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common -- 30 GND Ground -- 31 N/C -- -- 32 N/C -- -- 33 N/C -- -- 34 N/C -- -- 35 GND Ground -- 36 N/C -- --


ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines to the customer equipment:

Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the ADR shelves. Four inputs are allocated to each ADR platform. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility.

Eight sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each ADR platform connected to the xRAP-100.

Four sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the corresponding alarm relays of ADR shelves.

Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state, and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure A-13: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification

The following table lists the pin assignment for the ALARM IN/OUT connector.

Table A-22: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment

Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color

Shelf 1 1 ALM_01NO Output relay 1, normally open contact

Output Black

2 ALM_01COM Output relay 1, common contact

Output Brown

3 ALM_01NC Output relay 1, normally closed contact

Output Red

4 ALM_02NO Output relay 2, normally open contact

Output Orange


Output Yellow


Output Green




Output Blue


Output Violet


Output Gray


Output White


Output Pink


Output Light Green


Output Black/White


Output Brown/White


Output Red/White


Output Orange/White


Output Green/White


Output Blue/White


Output Violet/White


Output Red/Black


Output Orange/Black


Output Yellow/Black


Output Green/Black


Output Gray/Black

All shelves 25 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Pink/Black

26 CRIT_NO Critical alarm relay, normally open contact

Output Pink/Green

27 CRIT_COM Critical alarm relay, common contact

Output Pink/Red

28 MAJ_NC Major alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Pink/Violet

29 MAJ_NO Major alarm relay, normally open contact

Output Light Blue

30 MAJ_COM Major alarm relay, common contact

Output Light Blue/Brown

31 MIN_NC Minor alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Light Blue/Red



32 MIN_NO Minor alarm relay, normally open contact

Output Light Blue/Violet

33 MIN_COM Minor alarm relay, common contact

Output Light Blue/Black

34 WARN_COM Warning alarm relay, common contact

Output Gray/Green

Shelf 1 35 ALMIN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Red

36 ALM_IN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Violet

37 ALMIN2 External alarm input 2 Input Light Green/Black

38 ALM_IN2 External alarm input 2 Input Violet/Black

39 ALMIN3 External alarm input 3 Input Black/White dots

40 ALM_IN3 External alarm input 3 Input Brown/White dots

41 ALMIN4 External alarm input 4 Input Red/White dots

42 ALM_IN4 External alarm input 4 Input Orange/White dots

Shelf 2 43 ALMIN5 External alarm input 5 Input Green/White dots

44 ALM_IN5 External alarm input 5 Input Blue/White dots

45 ALMIN6 External alarm input 6 Input Violet/White dots

46 ALM_IN6 External alarm input 6 Input White/Black dots

47 ALMIN7 External alarm input 7 Input Yellow/Black dots

48 ALM_IN7 External alarm input 7 Input Green/Black dots

49 ALMIN8 External alarm input 8 Input Light Blue/Black dots

50 ALM_IN8 External alarm input 8 Input Pink/Black dots

Shelf 3 51 ALMIN9 External alarm input 9 Input Red/Black dots

52 ALM_IN9 External alarm input 9 Input Orange/Black dots

53 ALMIN10 External alarm input 10 Input Violet/Black dots

54 ALM_IN10 External alarm input 10 Input Gray/Black dots

55 ALMIN11 External alarm input 11 Input

56 ALM_IN11 External alarm input 11 Input Orange/Red dots

57 ALMIN12 External alarm input 12 Input Yellow/Red dots

58 ALM_IN12 External alarm input 12 Input Green/Red dots

Shelf 4 59 ALMIN13 External alarm input 13 Input Violet/Red dots

60 ALM_IN13 External alarm input 13 Input Gray/Red dots

61 ALMIN14 External alarm input 14 Input White/Red dots

62 ALM_IN14 External alarm input 14 Input Pink/Red dots

63 ALMIN15 External alarm input 15 Input Yellow/White

64 ALM_IN15 External alarm input 15 Input Gray/White

65 ALMIN16 External alarm input 16 Input Pink/White

66 ALM_IN16 External alarm input 16 Input Brown/Black



All shelves 67 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Blue/Black

68 WARN_NO Warning alarm relay, normally open contact

Output Gray/White dots

RAP-4B Connectors

SHELF ALARM Connectors

The four ALARM connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector can be connected to the ALARMS connector of an ADR, BG, or 9600 series platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen when looking into the connector).

Figure A-14: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin identification

The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.

Table A-23: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment


1 N/C -- -- 2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input 3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, - wire Input 4 ALM_IP2 Alarm input 2, + wire Input 5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, - wire Input 6 ALM_IP3 Alarm input 3, + wire Input 7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, - wire Input 8 ALM_IP4 Alarm input 4, + wire Input 9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, - wire Input 10 N/C -- -- 11 N/C -- -- 12 GND Ground -- 13 ALM_O1 Alarm output 1 common Output 14 N/C -- -- 15 GND Ground --



16 ALM_O2 Alarm output 2 common Output 17 N/C -- -- 18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input 19 N/C -- -- 20 GND Ground -- 21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common -- 22 N/C -- -- 23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input 24 GND Ground -- 25 N/C -- -- 26 GND Ground -- 27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input 28 N/C -- -- 29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common -- 30 GND Ground -- 31 N/C -- -- 32 N/C -- -- 33 N/C -- -- 34 N/C -- -- 35 GND Ground -- 36 N/C -- --

ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines to the customer equipment:

Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the ADR platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each one. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility.

Eight sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, that serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each ADR platform connected to the RAP-4B.

Four sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, that serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the corresponding alarm relays of ADR platforms.


Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure A-15: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification

The following table lists the pin assignment for the ALARM IN/OUT connector.

Table A-24: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment



Output Black


Output Brown


Output Red


Output Orange


Output Yellow


Output Green


Output Blue


Output Violet


Output Gray


Output White


Output Pink


Output Light Green


Output Black/White


Output Brown/White


Output Red/White


Output Orange/White


Output Green/White




Output Blue/White


Output Violet/White


Output Red/Black


Output Orange/Black


Output Yellow/Black


Output Green/Black


Output Gray/Black

All platforms 25 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Pink/Black


Output Pink/Green


Output Pink/Red


Output Pink/Violet


Output Light Blue


Output Light Blue/Brown


Output Light Blue/Red


Output Light Blue/Violet


Output Light Blue/Black


Output Gray/Green

Shelf 1 35 ALMIN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Red

36 ALM_IN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/Violet

37 ALMIN2 External alarm input 2 Input Light Green/Black

38 ALM_IN2 External alarm input 2 Input Violet/Black

39 ALMIN3 External alarm input 3 Input Black/White dots

40 ALM_IN3 External alarm input 3 Input Brown/White dots

41 ALMIN4 External alarm input 4 Input Red/White dots

42 ALM_IN4 External alarm input 4 Input Orange/White dots



Shelf 2 43 ALMIN5 External alarm input 5 Input Green/White dots

44 ALM_IN5 External alarm input 5 Input Blue/White dots

45 ALMIN6 External alarm input 6 Input Violet/White dots

46 ALM_IN6 External alarm input 6 Input White/Black dots

47 ALMIN7 External alarm input 7 Input Yellow/Black dots

48 ALM_IN7 External alarm input 7 Input Green/Black dots

49 ALMIN8 External alarm input 8 Input Light Blue/Black dots

50 ALM_IN8 External alarm input 8 Input Pink/Black dots

Shelf 3 51 ALMIN9 External alarm input 9 Input Red/Black dots

52 ALM_IN9 External alarm input 9 Input Orange/Black dots

53 ALMIN10 External alarm input 10 Input Violet/Black dots

54 ALM_IN10 External alarm input 10 Input Gray/Black dots

55 ALMIN11 External alarm input 11 Input

56 ALM_IN11 External alarm input 11 Input Orange/Red dots

57 ALMIN12 External alarm input 12 Input Yellow/Red dots

58 ALM_IN12 External alarm input 12 Input Green/Red dots

Shelf 4 59 ALMIN13 External alarm input 13 Input Violet/Red dots

60 ALM_IN13 External alarm input 13 Input Gray/Red dots

61 ALMIN14 External alarm input 14 Input White/Red dots

62 ALM_IN14 External alarm input 14 Input Pink/Red dots

63 ALMIN15 External alarm input 15 Input Yellow/White

64 ALM_IN15 External alarm input 15 Input Gray/White

65 ALMIN16 External alarm input 16 Input Pink/White

66 ALM_IN16 External alarm input 16 Input Brown/Black

All platforms 67 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Blue/Black


Output Gray/White dots


xRAP-D Connectors This section provides information on the connectors located on the xRAP-D unit.

Platform DC Input Power Connectors

The SHELF DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2, are 5-pin D-type male connectors. The following figure identifies the functions of the platform DC input connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure A-16: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions

SHELF Alarm Connectors

The SHELF alarm connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector is connected to the ALARMS connector of an ADR10000 platform. Refer to ALARMS Connector (page A-2) for description. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector, and the table lists the pin assignment for this connector.

Figure A-17: SHELF alarm connector pin identification

Table A-25: SHELF alarm connector pin assignment


1 N/C Not connected --

2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input

3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, – wire Input









10 ALM_O4 Alarm output 4 Output


12 GND Ground --



15 GND Ground --



18 BUZZ Buzzer Input


20 GND Ground --

21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm Output


23 MAJ_COM Major alarm Output

24 GND Ground --


26 GND Ground --

27 MIN_COM Minor alarm Output


29 WARN_COM Warning alarm Output

30 GND Ground --


32 GND Ground --



35 GND Ground --



ALARMS Connector

The ALARMS connector is a SCSI 68-pin female connector that carries the following groups of lines to the customer equipment:

Eight external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the ADR10000 platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each ADR10000 platform. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer’s facility.

Eight sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Four outputs are allocated to each ADR10000 platform connected to the xRAP-B/xRAP-D.

Eight sets of change-over relay contacts (four per platform) floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the corresponding alarm relays of ADR10000 platforms.

Two sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as Critical alarm buzzer activation signal. The relay is activated whenever a Critical alarm is detected in the corresponding platform. The signal can be used to activate a local buzzer (Critical buzzer) in the customer's alarms collecting system.

Two lines for muting the Critical buzzer in the customer's alarms collecting system.

Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state, and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the ALARMS connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by SAGEMCOM’s Network Solutions Division for connecting between the ALARMS connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-18: ALARMS connector pin identification


Table A-26: ALARMS connector pin assignment


Shelf 2 1 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Black


Output Brown


Output Red


Output Orange


Output Yellow


Output Green


Output Blue


Output Violet


Output Gray

10 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output White


Output Pink


Output Light green

13 BUZZ_NC Buzzer relay, normally closed contact

Output Black/white

14 BUZZ_COM Buzzer relay, common contact

Output Brown/ white

15 BUZZ_NO Buzzer relay, normally open contact

Output Red/white

16 ALMO1_NC Output relay 1, normally closed contact

Output Orange/ white

17 ALMO1_COM Output relay 1, common contact

Output Green/ white



18 ALMO1_NO Output relay 1, normally open contact

Output Blue/white


Output Violet/ white


Output Red/black


Output Orange/ black


Output Yellow/ black


Output Green/ black


Output Gray/black


Output Pink/black


Output Pink/green


Output Pink/red

28 ALMIN_1 External alarm input 1

Input Pink/violet


Input Light blue

30 GND ground Light blue/brown


Input Light blue/red


Input Light blue/violet

33 GND ground Light blue/black

34 BUZZ_OFF Buzzer mute Output Gray/green



Shelf 1 35 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Gray/red


Output Gray/violet


Output Light green/black


Output Violet/black


Output Black/white dots


Output Brown/ white dots


Output Red/white dots


Output Orange/ white dots


Output Green/ white dots

44 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact

Output Blue/white dots


Output Violet/ white dots


Output White/ black dots

47 BUZZ_NC Buzzer relay, normally closed contact

Output Yellow/ black dots

48 BUZZ_COM Buzzer relay, common contact

Output Green/ black dots

49 BUZZ_NO Buzzer relay, normally open contact

Output Light blue/ black dots


Output Pink/black dots


Output Red/black dots


Output Orange/ black dots




Output Violet/black dots


Output Gray/black dots


Output Orange/red dots


Output Yellow/red dots


Output Green/red dots


Output Blue/red dots


Output Violet/red dots


Output Gray/red dots


Output White/red dots


Input Pink/red dots


Input Yellow/ white

64 GND ground Gray/white


Input Pink/white


Input Brown/ black

67 GND ground Blue/black

68 BUZZ_OFF Buzzer mute Output Gray/white dots

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page B-1

In this appendix: Overview ........................................................................................................ B-1Broadband Forum........................................................................................... B-1Environmental Standards................................................................................ B-2ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute ............................. B-2IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission ........................................... B-3IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers................................... B-4IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force.......................................................... B-5ISO: International Organization for Standardization...................................... B-7ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union ........................................... B-8MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum........................................................................ B-12NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology................................ B-13North American Standards ........................................................................... B-13OMG: Object Management Group ............................................................... B-14TMF: TeleManagement Forum .................................................................... B-14Web Protocol Standards ............................................................................... B-14

Overview The following is a list of standards and reference documents that relate to the ADR platform families. The standards are listed alphabetically by groups.

Broadband Forum Af-phy-0064.000 – ATM Forum E1 Physical Layer Interface.

Af-phy-0086.000 – ATM Forum IMA V1.0.

Af-phy-0086.001 – ATM Forum IMA V1.1.

B Standards and References


Af-phy-00121.00 – ATM Forum Traffic Management Specifications V4.1.

Environmental Standards EuP Directive 2005/32/EC: Ecodesign Requirements for Energy-Using

Products.

OHSAS 18001: Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems - Requirements.

REACh Directive 2005/32/EC: Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals.

RoHS Directive 2005/747/EC: Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC: Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment.

ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EN 300 019-1-1 Class 1.2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Part 1-1: Classification of Environmental Conditions; Storage.

EN 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Part 1-2: Classification of Environmental Conditions; Transportation.

EN 300 019-1-3 Classes 3.2 and 3.3: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Part 1-3: Classification of Environmental Conditions; Stationary use at weather-protected locations.

EN 300 019-2-4 Class 4.1: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Part 2-4: Specification of Environmental Tests; Stationary use at non-weather-protected locations.

EN 300 132 -2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Power Supply Interface at the Input to Telecommunications Equipment.


EN 300-166: Physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces for equipment using the 2 048 kbit/s based plesiochronous or synchronous digital hierarchies.

EN 300 386: Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.

EN 300-417-2-1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment.

EN 300-417-5-1: Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment.

EN 300-462-5-1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements for synchronization networks.

EN 300-689: 34 Mbit/s digital leased lines (D34U and D34S); Terminal equipment interface.

EN 301-164: SDH leased lines connection characteristics.

EN 301-165: SDH leased lines Network and Terminal interface presentation.

EN 55022: Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.

ETR 114: Functional Architecture of SDH Transport Networks.

ETR 275: Considerations on Transmission Delay and Transmission Delay value for components on connections supporting speech communication over evolving digital networks.

FTZ 1TR9: Deutsche Telekom A.G. EMC Requirements.

FTZ 153 TL 1part 1: Synchronous Multiplexing Equipment (SM) for Synchronous Multiplex Hierarchy.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 68: Environmental Testing.

IEC 917: Modular Order for the Development of Mechanical Structures for Electronic Equipment Practices.


IEC 3309: Information Technology – Telecommunications and Information Exchange between Systems – High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) Procedures – Frame Structure.

IEC 9314-3: Information Processing Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Multiplex.

IEC 9595, Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection, Common Management Information Services.

IEC 9596, Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection, Common Management Information Protocol.

IEC 13239: Information technology — Telecommunications and information exchange between systems — High-level data link control (HDLC) procedures.

IEC 17025: General Requirements for Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories.

IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment Classification and Requirements.

IEC 60825-2 (AS/NZS 2211.2): Safety of Laser Products – Part 2: Safety of Optical Fiber Communication System (OFCS).

IEC/EN/UL 60950-1: Information Technology Equipment - Safety - General Requirements.

IS 1249-1: Safety of Laser products: Equipment classification requirements and users guide.

IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IEEE 802.1ad: Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks—Revision—Amendment 4: Provider Bridges.

IEEE 802.1ag: Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.

IEEE 802.1D: Media access control (MAC) Bridges (Incorporates IEEE 802.1t and IEEE 802.1w).

IEEE 802.1P: Traffic Class Expediting and Dynamic Multicast Filtering.

IEEE 802.1Q: Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks—Revision.

IEEE 802.1w: Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree.


IEEE 802.3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications.

IEEE 802.3ad: Link Aggregation.

IEEE 802.3ah: Ethernet in the First Mile (Link OAM).

IEEE 802.3x: Full Duplex Operation and Flow Control Protocol.

IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force

RFC 1493: Definition of Managed Objects for Bridges.

RFC 1643: Ethernet-like Interfaces.

RFC 1662: PPP in HDLC-Life Framing.

RFC 1757: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base.

RFC 1823: LDAP Application Program Interface (API).

RFC 1901: Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2.

RFC 2108: Definitions of Managed Objects for IEEE 802.3 Repeater Devices using SMIv2.

RFC 2251: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3) [specification of the LDAP on-the-wire protocol].

RFC 2252: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Attribute Syntax Definitions.

RFC 2253: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): UTF-8 String Representation of Distinguished Names.

RFC 2254: The String Representation of LDAP Search Filters.

RFC 2255: The LDAP URL Format.

RFC 2256: A Summary of the X.500(96) User Schema for use with LDAPv3.

RFC 2401: Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol.

RFC 2409: Internet Key Exchange Protocol (IKE).

RFC 2474: Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers.

RFC 2597: Assured Forwarding PHB Group.


RFC 2615: PPP over SONET/SDH.

RFC 2665: Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like Interface Types.

RFC 2674: Bridge MIB with VLAN/Traffic Classes/Multicast Extensions.

RFC 2702: Requirements for Traffic Engineering Over MPLS.

RFC 2737: Entity MIB (Version 2).

RFC 2819: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base.

RFC 2829: Authentication Methods for LDAP.

RFC 2830: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Extension for Transport Layer Security.

RFC 2863: Interfaces Group MIB.

RFC 3014: Notification Log MIB.

RFC 3031: Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture.

RFC 3032: MPLS Label Stack Encoding.

RFC 3246: An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior).

RFC 3270: Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of Differentiated Services.

RFC 3377: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Technical Specification.

RFC 3411: SNMP Framework MIB.

RFC 3414: SNMP User-Based SM MIB.

RFC 3415: SNMP Vies-Based ACM MIB.

RFC 3443: Time To Live (TTL) Processing in Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Networks.

RFC 3812: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic Engineering (TE) Management Information Base (MIB).

RFC 3813: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Switching Router (LSR) Management Information Base (MIB).

RFC 3916: Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3).

RFC 3985: Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Architecture.

RFC 4090: Fast Reroute Extensions to RSVP-TE for LSP Tunnels.


RFC 4125: Maximum Allocation Bandwidth Constraints Model for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering.

RFC 4126: Max Allocation with Reservation Bandwidth Constraints Model for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering & Performance Comparisons.

RFC 4379: Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures.

RFC 4448: Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Ethernet over MPLS Networks.

RFC 5462: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Stack Entry: "EXP" Field Renamed to "Traffic Class" Field.

IETF Drafts:

draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-ldp.

draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-mcast-reqts.

draft-ietf-magma-snoop.

draft-ietf-mpls-rsvp-te-p2mp.

draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-framework.

draft-ietf-mpls-tp-nm-req.

draft-ietf-pwe3-ethernet-encap.

draft-martini-l2circuit-encap-mpls.

draft-sajassi-l2vpn-vpls-multicast-congruency.

draft-vasseur-mpls-backup-computation.

ISO: International Organization for Standardization

A2LA: Accredited Laboratory for Electrical and Mechanical Testing.

ISO 9001: Quality Management System – Requirements.

ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems – Requirements With Guidance for Use.

ISO 27001: Information Security Management Systems – Requirements.

TL 9000, QuEST Forum: Quality Management System – Requirements & Measurements Handbooks for the Telecom Industry.


ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union

G.650: Definition and Test Methods for the Relevant Parameters of Single-Mode Fibers.

G.651: Characteristics of a 50/125 µm Multimode Graded Index Optical Fiber Cable.

G.652: Characteristics of a Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.

G.653: Characteristics of a Dispersion-Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.

G.654: Characteristics of a Cut-off Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.

G.655: Characteristics of a Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable.

G.661: Definition and Test Methods for the Relevant Generic Parameters of Optical Amplifier Devices and Subsystems.

G.662: Generic Characteristics of Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices and Subsystems.

G.663: Application Related Aspects of Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices and Subsystems.

G.664: Optical Safety Procedures and Requirements for Optical Transport Systems.

G.671: Transmission Characteristics of Passive Optical Components.

G.691: Optical Interfaces for Single Channel SDH Systems with Optical Amplifiers and STM-64 Systems (Draft).

G.692: Optical Interfaces for Multi-Channel Systems with Optical Amplifiers.

G.694.1: Spectral Grids for WDM Applications: DWDM Frequency Grid.

G.694.2: Spectral Grids for WDM Applications: CWDM Wavelength Grid.

G.695: Optical Interfaces for Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing Applications.

G.703: Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces.


G.704: Synchronous Frame Structures Used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 kbps Hierarchical Levels.

G.706: Frame Alignment and CRC Procedures Relating to Basic Frame Structure Defined in Rec G.704.

G.707: Network Node Interface for the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.

G.709: Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN).

G.752: Characteristics of digital multiplex equipments based on a second order bit rate of 6312 kbit/s and using positive justification.

G.772: Protected Monitoring Points Provided on Digital Transmission Systems.

G.774 & G774.n: SDH Information Model.

G.775: Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH signals.

G.781: Synchronization Layer Functions.

G.783: Characteristics of SDH Equipment Functional Blocks.

G.784: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Management.

G.798: Characteristics of OTN Hierarchy Equipment Functional Blocks.

G.803: Architectures of Transport Networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.

G.805: Generic Functional Architecture of Transport Networks.

G.806: Characteristics of Transport Equipment –Description Methodology and Generic Functionality.

G.809: Functional Architecture of Connectionless Layer Networks.

G.811: Timing Characteristics of Primary Reference Clocks.

G.812: Timing Requirements of Slave Clocks Suitable for Use as Node Clocks in Synchronization Networks.

G.813: Timing Characteristics of SDH Equipment Slave Clocks (SEC).

G.823: The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Based on the 2048 kbit/s Hierarchy.

G.825: The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Based on the SDH (Draft).


G.8251: The Control of Jitter and Wander within the Optical Transport Network (OTN).

G.826: Error Performance Parameters and Objectives for International, Constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate.

G.828: Error Performance Parameters and Objectives for International, Constant Bit Rate Synchronous Digital Paths.

G.829: Error Performance Events for SDH Multiplex and Regenerator Sections.

G.831: Management Capabilities of Transport Networks Based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).

G.841: Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures.

G.842: Inter-Working of SDH Protection Architectures.

G.872: Architecture of Optical Transport Networks.

G.874: Management Aspects of the Optical Transport Network Element.

G.874.1: Optical Transport Network (OTN): Protocol-Neutral Management Information Model for the Network Element View.

G.957: Optical Interfaces for Equipment and Systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy.

G.959.1: Optical Transport Network Physical Layer Interfaces.

G.975: Forward Error Correction for Submarine Systems.

G.985: 100 Mbit/s point-to-point Ethernet based optical access system.

G.7041: Generic Framing Procedure (GFP).

G.7042: Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) for Virtual Concatenated Signals.

G.7713: Distributed Connection Management.

G.7713.2: RSVP-TE Implementation.

G.7714: Generalized Automatic Discovery Techniques.

G.7714.1: Protocol for Automatic Discovery in SDH & OTN network.

G.7715: ASON Routing.

G.7715.1: Based on PNNI, OSPF or IS_IS.

G.8010/Y.1306: Architecture of Ethernet Layer Networks.


G.8011/Y.1307: Ethernet Services Framework.

G.8011.1/Y.1307.1: Ethernet Private Line Service.

G.8011.2/Y.1307.2: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service.

G.8012/Y.1308: Ethernet UNI and Ethernet NNI.

G.8261/Y. 1361: Timing and synchronization aspects in packet network.

G.8262/Y. 1362: Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock (EEC).

I.356: ATM Layer Cell Transfer Performance.

I.361: ATM Layer Specification.

I.371: Traffic Control and Congestion Control.

I.610: ATM Operation and Maintenance Principles.

M.3010: Principles for a Telecommunications Management Network.

M.3013: Considerations for a Telecommunications Management Network.

M.3100: Generic Network Information Model.

M.3180: Catalogue of TMN Management Information.

M.3200: TMN Management Services and Telecommunications Managed Areas: Overview.

M.3300: TMN F Interface Requirements.

M.3400: TMN Management Functions.

Q.821: Alarm Surveillance.

Q.822: Performance Monitoring.

X.217: Open Systems Interconnection, Service Definition for the Association Control Service Element.

X.219: Remote Operations - Model, Notation and Service Definition.

X.227: Open Systems Interconnection, Connection-Oriented Protocol for the Association Control Service Element - Protocol Specification.

X.229: Remote Operations: Protocol Specification.

X.710: Open Systems Interconnection, Common Management Information Service.

X.720: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management Information - Management Information Model.


X.721 Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management Information - Definition of Management Information.

X.722: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management Information - Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects.

X.731: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - State Management Function.

X.733: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Alarm Reporting Function.

X.743: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Time Management Function.

X.744: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Software Management Function.

Y.1311: Network-based VPNs - Generic architecture and service requirements.

Y.1710: Requirements for Operation & Maintenance functionality for MPLS networks.

Y.1711: Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks.

MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum MEF4 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic

Framework.

MEF6 Metro Ethernet Services Definitions.

MEF7 EMS-NMS Information Model.

MEF9 Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI.

MEF10 Ethernet Service Attributes.

MEF11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework.

MEF12 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 2: Ethernet Services Layer.

MEF14 Test Suite for Ethernet Traffic Management.


NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology

FIPS PUB 197: Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).

FIPS PUB 140-2: Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules.

North American Standards ANSI FC–F1-2: Fiber Channel Physical Interface REV 10.

ANSI T1.102: Digital hierarchy electrical interface.

ANSI T1.105: Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) - Basic Description including Multiplex Structure, Rates, and Formats.

ANSI X3.296: Single-Byte Command code sets CONnection (SBCON) architecture.

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15: Radio Emission.

FCC Part 101.147 Fixed microwave services: (i8, i7, K7, 7)

NEBS GR1089 and GR63 (temperature aspect)

NEBS Level 3 support for N.A. platforms.

Rural Utility Service (RUS) Certification.

Telcordia GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection.

Telcordia GR-253-CORE: Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria.

Telcordia GR-383-CORE: COMMON LANGUAGE® Equipment Codes (CLEI™ Codes) – Generic Requirements for Bar Code Labels.

Telcordia GR-487-CORE: Generic Requirements for Electronic Equipment Cabinets.

Telcordia GR-499-CORE: Transport System Generic Requirements (TSGR): Common Requirements.

Telcordia GR-1089-CORE: Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment.

Telcordia GR-1209-CORE: Generic Requirements for Passive Optical Components.


Telcordia GR-1230-CORE: SONET Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring Equipment Generic Criteria.

Telcordia GD-1244-CORE: Clock for the synchronization network: Common generic criteria.

Telcordia GR-1312-CORE: Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber Amplifiers and Proprietary Dense Wavelength-Division Multiplexed Systems.

Telcordia GR-1400-CORE: SONET Dual-Fed Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) Equipment Generic Criteria.

Telcordia GD-2979-CORE: Common Generic Requirements for Optical Add-Drop Multiplexers (OADMs) and Optical Terminal Multiplexers (OTMs).

OMG: Object Management Group Notification Service Specification V 1.0.

The Common Object Request Broker: Architecture and Specification V 2.6.

TMF: TeleManagement Forum TMF 513: MTNM Business Agreement Release 3.5.

TMF 518: Framework Document Delivery Package (DDP) Business Agreement (BA) V1.1.

TMF 518: Resource Provisioning DDP BA V1.0.

TMF 608: Multi Technology Network Management Information Agreement V 2.1 and V 3.5.

TMF 814: Multi Technology Network Management Solution Set V 2.1 and V 3.5.

TMF 854: The MTOSI XML Solution Set Package Release 1.1.

Web Protocol Standards

W3C: World Wide Web Consortium

SOAP 1.1: Simple Object Access Protocol.


WSDL 1.1: Web Services Description Language.

WS-I: Web Services Interoperability Organization

WS-I Basic Profile 1.1: Web Services Interoperability.

1

19 in. Rack Installation • 3-50

2

2 Mbps tests • 7-7

3


4


A

About This Manual • xiii Adding a Second TPU/OCU • 5-36 Air Filter Preventive Maintenance • 8-3 Alarm Cables • 3-13 Alarm handling test • 7-20 ALARM IN/OUT Connector • A-35, A-

39 Alarms Client Cable • A-4 ALARMS Connector • A-2, A-45 Assigning modules to slots • 8-10 Attaching Protective Covers • 3-60 Attaching TPUs/OCU to the ADR10000

Shelf • 5-28 Attaching TPUs/OCUs to the shelf • 5-28

B

Basic ADR10000 Shelf • 2-32 BER and stability test • 7-26 Broadband Forum • B-1

C

Cables

alarm • 3-13 data • 3-17 DC power • 3-11 electric traffic • 3-14 grounding • 3-9 management • 3-13 optical fibers • 3-16 PIM2_63S traffic • 6-7 timing (clock) • 3-14

Card and Module Installation • 5-1 Cards • 5-1

ECU • 5-3 FCU • 5-2 MXC300 • 5-4 Quad I/O • 5-7

Checking Cards and Modules Installed in Each Shelf • 7-3

Checking DC Voltage Polarity • 3-88 Cleaning Optical Connectors • 3-5 Cleaning the air filter • 8-5 Commissioning Tests • 7-1 Connecting Alarm Cables • 6-4 Connecting an optical fiber to a data

module • 6-23 Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the

xRAP-D • 3-56 Connecting Electrical Interfaces through

the TPU • 6-19 Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A

Racks • 6-1 Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the

ADR10000 • 6-12 Connecting Management Cables • 6-24

Index

ADR10000 - Installation and Maintenance Manual- 253456107-A Sagemcom document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page I-2

Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules and Cards • 6-5

Connecting Power Cables • 6-3 Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables • 6-24 Connection via RAP • 1-10 Connector Pin Assignments • A-1 Connectors

ECU300/ECU300-F card • A-2 EISMB/DIOM/MCSM • A-32 MXC300 DC input power • A-9 PIM2_21 connection data • A-10 PIM2_63/B connection data • A-19 PIM2_63S connection data • A-24 xRAP-100 • A-33 xRAP-B • A-43

Connectors Pin Assignment • A-1

D

Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs • 3-17

Data Network Commissioning Tests • 7-17

DC Power Cables • 3-11 DC Power Warnings • 1-11 DC Supply Circuit Connection to the

Grounding Conductor • 1-18 Document Conventions • xiv Document Organization • xiv

E

ECU300/ECU300-F Card • 5-3 ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors •

A-2 EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors • A-

32 Electric Traffic Cables • 3-14 Electricity Safety Warning • 1-14 Environmental and Health Concerns • 1-

27

Environmental Considerations • 4-8 Environmental Standards • B-2 Equipment Grounding Requirements • 1-

9 Equipment Installation • 3-35 Equipment Installation Sequence • 3-36 Equipment power-on test • 7-10, 7-23 ETHERNET Connectors • A-8 Ethernet Port Precautions • 1-19 ETSI

European Telecommunications Standards Institute • B-2

Expanded ADR10000 with I/O Protection • 2-33

Expanding a PIM2_21 I/O Slot to 42 E1s • 5-18

Extracting RJ-45 connectors • 6-26 Extracting/Inserting DIN 1.0/2.3 coaxial

connectors • 6-36 Extracting/Inserting LC connectors and

SFPs • 6-29

F

F-CHANNEL Connector • A-7 FCU300 Card • 5-2 Fibers and cables

connecting • 6-1, 6-9, 6-12, 6-19, 6-24

I/O protection cables • 6-12 preparing • 3-8 routing • 6-6, 6-11, 6-22

Frame loss rate test • 7-18

G

General • 1-23 General Safety Requirements • 1-5 Grounding • 3-9, 4-27

racks • 3-49 RAP-4B • 3-82


RAP-BG • 3-76 ADR10000 shelf • 4-27 xRAP-100 • 3-68

Grounding Cables • 3-9 Grounding Requirements • 1-7 Grounding the ADR10000 Shelf • 4-27

I

Identification of TUV CE Listing • 1-16 IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission • B-3

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic

Engineers • B-4 IETF

Internet Engineering Task Force • B-5 Input sensitivity test • 7-9, 7-24 Installation

(300/900)options • 4-1 procedure • 3-42

Installation Options • 4-1 Installation Warning • 1-4 Installing

(300/900)Ancillary units • 3-50 cable guide • 3-88 cable slack tray • 3-90 Cards • 5-1

ECU • 5-3 FCU • 5-2 MXC300 • 5-4 Quad I/O • 5-7

fiber guide • 3-89 FST • 3-92 Integrating equipment in one rack • 4-

12 Modules

double-slot modules • 5-19

I/O electrical, optical, CWDM, and electrical • 5-14

OHU • 5-19 SIM16_1 • 5-15 TPU • 5-21, 5-23, 5-25, 5-27

ODF • 3-94 OPP • 3-97 PIM2_63S trafficcable box tray • 3-

91 Power sources • 3-4 racks • 3-44 RAP-4B • 3-81 RAP-BG • 3-74 SFP/XFP transceivers • 5-17 the shelf in the rack • 4-7 Typical ADR10000 installation • 4-10 xRAP-100 • 3-66

Installing a TPU under the ADR10000 Shelf • 5-32

Installing a TPU/OCU on the ADR10000 shelf • 5-29

Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel • 6-11 Installing Ancillary Units in Racks • 3-50 Installing Double-Slot Modules • 5-19 Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU •

5-25 Installing Equipment Racks • 3-44 Installing Extendable Rails • 3-49 Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU •

5-24 Installing Quad I/O Cards in Quad I/O

Slots • 5-9 Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in

optical/CWDM modules and cards • 5-17

Installing SIM16_1 modules in quad slots • 5-15

Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU • 5-23


Installing the Cable Guide • 3-88 Installing the Cable Slack Tray • 3-90 Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A

Racks • 3-89 Installing the FST • 3-92 Installing the ODF • 3-94 Installing the OHU module • 5-19 Installing the OPP • 3-97 Installing the PIM2_63S Traffic Cable

Box Tray • 3-91 Installing the RAP-4B • 3-81, 3-82 Installing the RAP-BG • 3-74, 3-75 Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU

Shelf • 5-22 Installing the Vertical Air Filter • 4-23 Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in Racks •

4-7 Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in the

Horizontal Position • 4-15 Installing the ADR10000 Shelf in the

Vertical Position • 4-15 Installing the xRAP-100 • 3-66 Installing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers •

3-72 Installing the xRAP-D • 3-51 Installing TPU Modules • 5-21 Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU •

5-27 Installing ADR10000

Before You Start Safety Guidelines • 1-1

Installing ADR10000 Cards • 5-1 Installing ADR10000 Modules • 5-12 Installing, Optical, CWDM, and

Electrical I/O Modules • 5-12 Integrating equipment in one rack • 4-12 Integrating ADR10000 Shelves and Other

Equipment in One Rack • 4-12 Intended Audience • xiii

Introduction • 2-30 IOP hardware protection test • 7-14 ISO

International Organization for Standardization • B-7

ITU-T International Telecommunication

Union • B-8 ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and

Requirements • 1-17

J

Jewelry Removal Warning • 1-6

L

Laser Classification • 1-19 Laser Device Operating Precautions • 1-

21 Laser Information • 1-20 Laser Safety Requirements • 1-19 Laser Safety Statutory Warning • 1-20 Layout of ADR10000 Horizontal

Installation in ETSI A Racks • 4-2 Layout of ADR10000 Vertical

Installation in ETSI A Racks • 4-6 LOS detection test • 7-23 Loss of Signal (LOS) detection test • 7-8

M

Main Equipment Dimensions • 3-2 Maintenance • 8-1

onsite troubleshooting • 8-12 preventive • 8-2 replacing cards and modules • 8-21 replacing RAP components • 8-28 test equipment, tools and materials •

8-1 traffic monitoring system • 8-7

Maintenance action handling test • 7-25 Maintenance actions tests • 7-16


Management Cables • 3-13 Measuring Optical Levels • 7-5 MEF

Metro Ethernet Forum • B-12 Modules

double-slot modules • 5-19 I/O electrical, optical, CWDM, and

electrical • 5-14 OHU • 5-19 SIM16_1 • 5-15 TPU • 5-21, 5-23, 5-25, 5-27

Monitoring Modules Traffic • 8-11 Monitoring options • 8-10 Monitoring Signal Levels • 8-10 MSP test • 7-12 MS-SPRing test • 7-13 MXC redundancy test • 7-16 MXC300 Card • 5-4 MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors •

A-9

N

Network Commissioning Tests • 7-6 Network timing synchronization test • 7-8 NIST

National Institute of Standards and Technology • B-13

North American Standards • B-13

O

Obtaining Technical Documentation • xv OMG

Object Management Group • B-14 Onsite Troubleshooting • 8-12 Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and

Routing • 6-1 Optical Fibers • 3-16 Optical Network Commissioning Tests •

7-21

Optical power measurement test • 7-22 Outline of Installation Procedure • 3-42 Overview • xiii, 1-1, 3-1, 7-1, 8-1, A-1,

B-1

P

Path protection and nonretrieval test • 7-11

Path protection test • 7-24 Personnel Training • 1-24 Physical Location • 3-4 PIM2_21 Connection Data • A-10 PIM2_42 Connection Data • A-13 PIM2_63/B Connection Data • A-19 PIM2_63S Connection Data • A-24 Platform DC Input Power Connectors •

A-43 Platform Installation • 4-1 Power Sources • 3-4 Power Supply Requirements • 1-10 Preliminary Preparations • 3-35 Preparations for installation • 3-1, 3-5, 3-

6, 3-8, 3-35, 4-1, 4-8 Preparing Cables and Fibers • 3-8 Preparing DC Input Power Cables • 3-52,

3-74, 3-81 Preventive Maintenance • 8-2 Principles of Operation • 8-7 Protection Against Electrostatic

Discharge • 1-22

Q

Quad I/O Cards • 5-7 Qualified Personnel Warning • 1-3

R

Rack Alarm Panel Power and Alarm Connection Options • 3-33

Rack Floor Marking • 3-45 Rack Grounding • 3-49


Rack Grounding Requirements • 1-8 Rack Installation • 3-44

19 • 3-50 concrete floors • 3-45 extendable rails • 3-49 floating floors • 3-48 floor marking • 3-45 grounding • 3-49 suspended overhead tray assembly •

3-49 wooden floors • 3-47

Rack Installation on Concrete Floors • 3-45

Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended) Floors • 3-48

Rack Installation on Wooden Floors • 3-47

RAP input power cables • 3-12 RAP-4B • 3-30 RAP-4B Connectors • A-38 RAP-BG • 3-29 Recommended Cleaning Methods • 8-4 Related Documentation • xv Replacing

cards • 8-21 circuit breakers • 8-28, 8-29 modules • 8-21 RAP components • 8-28

Replacing Cards and Modules • 8-21 Replacing ECU300/ECU300-

F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F Cards • 8-25 Replacing I/O Modules • 8-26 Replacing MXC300 Cards • 8-22 Replacing RAP Components • 8-28 Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers • 8-26 Replacing the FCU300 • 8-27 Replacing the NVM on MXC300 Cards •

8-24

Replacing xRAP-100 Circuit Breakers • 8-28

Replacing xRAP-D Circuit Breakers • 8-29

Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials • 8-1

Response to events • 8-9 Routing and Connecting Cables to Data

Modules (EISMBs/DIOMs/MCSMs) • 6-22

Routing and connecting coaxial cables • 6-11

Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules • 6-6

Routing and connecting multipair cables • 6-6

Routing and Connecting the Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S • 6-9

S

Safety and Workmanship • 8-21 SDH Commissioning Tests • 7-6 SDH tests • 7-8 Selecting a channel • 8-9 Selecting a module • 8-8 Severity assignment test • 7-15 SHELF Alarm Connectors • A-43 SHELF ALARM Connectors • A-33, A-

38 Shelf DC Input Power Connectors • A-33 Shelf power cables • 3-13 Shelf Power-On Test Procedure • 7-6 Shelf types

basic • 2-32 expanded • 2-33

Site Commissioning Tests • 7-3 Site Environmental Requirements • 3-2 Site Preparation • 3-1


Site Preparation and Rack Installation • 3-1

Stability test • 7-20 Stabilization time • 8-9 Standards and References • B-1 Support • xvi Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly • 3-

49 System recovery and reset tests • 7-19

T

T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors • A-7

Technical Assistance • xvi Test Equipment • 7-2 Test equipment setup • 7-7 Test setup and required test equipment •

7-21 Throughput and latency tests • 7-17 Timing (Clock) Cables • 3-14 TMF

TeleManagement Forum • B-14 Tool kit • 6-25 Tool Kit • 6-25 Tools and test equipment • 3-5 Tools and Test Equipment • 3-5 TPM2_42_2 Protection Assignment for

the ADR10000 • 6-18 Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S • 6-7 Traffic monitoring • 8-7, 8-9, 8-10

modules traffic monitoring • 8-11 options • 8-10 principles of operation • 8-7 signal levels monitoring • 8-10

Traffic Monitoring System • 8-7 Traffic stability test • 7-10 Training for Laser Safety • 1-20 Transmission alarm handling tests • 7-15

Troubleshooting • 8-12 Troubleshooting Management

Communication • 8-20 Troubleshooting Power Problems • 8-13 Troubleshooting the Timing Subsystem •

8-18 Troubleshooting Transmission and

Traffic Alarms • 8-19 Troubleshooting Using Component

Indicators • 8-14 Typical ADR10000 Installation • 4-10

U

UL/TUV Equipment Grounding Requirements • 1-17

UL/TUV Grounded Conductors Requirements • 1-17

UL/TUV Overcurrent Protection Requirements • 1-16

UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements • 1-15

Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection • 3-6

Use of Temporary EPA • 1-24

V

Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks • 7-4

W

Warning Definition • 1-2 Warning Label • 1-16 Warning Labels for Laser Products • 1-20 Web Protocol Standards • B-15 Work Arrangements within a Temporary

EPA • 1-26

X

ADR Rack Installation Options • 3-7 ADR10000 1


1 protection scheme connections • 6-14

2 protection scheme connections (PIM2_63) • 6-15

2 protection scheme connections (PIM2_63S) • 6-16

3 protection scheme connections • 6-17

ADR10000 Accessories • 3-19 ADR10000 Horizontal Shelf and

Accessories Installation Sequence • 3-37

ADR10000 I/O Protection Options • 2-31 ADR10000 Platform Overview • 2-30

ADR10000 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities • 2-35

ADR10000 Vertical Shelf and Accessories Installation Sequence • 3-40

xRAP-100 • 3-26 xRAP-100 alarms cable • A-5 xRAP-100 Connectors • A-33 xRAP-D • 3-19 xRAP-D Connectors • A-43

If you encounter problems during installation or use, do not hesitate to:

CONTACT OUR "SDH PRODUCTS" HOTLINE

The telephone co-ordinates, Fax and E-mail, are registered on your maintenance contract

Don't forget to provide yourself with your customer number

which is written on your invoice.

To obtain a maintenance contract, please contact your commercial interface

Registered office: 250, route de l'Empereur, 92848 RUEIL MALMAISON CEDEX Tel.: +33 (0) 1 57 61 10 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 57 61 10 10 http://www.sagemcom.com

ADR10000_I&M MANUAL_8.2.4_253456107_Ed01

Documents

Transcript of ADR10000_I&M MANUAL_8.2.4_253456107_Ed01